Lexicon RV-8 Stereo Receiver User guide

RV-8 Receiver

User Guide

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.

Read these instructions.

2.

Keep these instructions.

3.

Heed all warnings.

4.

Follow all instructions.

5.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

6.

Clean only with a dry cloth.

7.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8.

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or another apparatus

(including amplifiers) that produces heat.

9.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A groundingtype plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as when a power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

• Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions for power requirements. Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use of different line cord and/or attachment plug.

• Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or directly above heat-producing equipment such as power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in the product specification.

• Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit’s connectors.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Re-orient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. Do not place objects containing liquid, such as vases, on this apparatus.

Lexicon Inc.

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Tel

Fax

781-280-0300

781-280-0490 www.harmanspecialtygroup.com

Customer Service

Telephone:

Sales Fax:

781-280-0300

781-280-0495

Service Fax: 781-280-0499

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Pat. No’s 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 and other U.S. and world-wide patents issued and pending. DTS, DTS-ES, Neo:6, and DTS 96/24 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703 and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.

SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.

SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

Hammerhead is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

Lexicon, Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553;

D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. Lexicon LIVE is a trademark of Harman International Industries, Inc.

© 2006 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains is subject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document.

ii

Introduction

Lexicon

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS

This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide before attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.

The following symbols are used in the document:

Appears on the component to indicate the presence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside the enclosu

r

e

–

voltage that may be sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.

WARNING

CAUTION!

Note:

Appears on the component to indicate important operating and maintenance instructions in the accompanying literature.

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death.

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage or destruction to part or all of the product.

Calls attention to information that is essential to highlight.

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 NAME EDIT INPUT NAME

Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be selected with the remote control Menu arrow to access the menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,

INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the

DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will continue to be used as an example throughout this document.

Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.

This document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.

RV-8

Table of Contents

Documentation Conventions........................................................ ii

Getting Started

About the RV-8.......................................................................... 1-2

Highlights ............................................................................. 1-4

Product Registration .................................................................. 1-5

Installation Considerations......................................................... 1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation ........................................... 1-6

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview ................................................................ 2-2

Rear-Panel Overview.................................................................. 2-6

Tuner Overview....................................................................... 2-10

Selecting a Station .............................................................. 2-10

Direct Station Access ........................................................... 2-10

Tune/Seek Access ................................................................ 2-10

Scan Mode .......................................................................... 2-11

Loading Presets ................................................................... 2-11

Saving Presets ..................................................................... 2-11

Naming Presets ................................................................... 2-11

Editing Presets ..................................................................... 2-12

Autoload ............................................................................. 2-12

Amplifier Overview.................................................................. 2-13

Amplifier Channel Status ..................................................... 2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output .................. 2-13

Headphone Overview.............................................................. 2-14

Remote Control Overview ....................................................... 2-14

Operation Considerations .................................................... 2-14

MAIN Menu ........................................................................ 2-15

Menu Navigation ................................................................ 2-15

Menu Item Selection ........................................................... 2-15

Remote Control Buttons ...................................................... 2-17

Introduction

Command Matrix ............................................................... 2-18

Understanding the Zones ........................................................ 2-28

Two-Line Status....................................................................... 2-28

STATUS Menus........................................................................ 2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions ................................ 2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters..................................................... 2-35

Setup

Setup ........................................................................................ 3-2

Input Setup ............................................................................... 3-4

Changing Input Names ......................................................... 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................ 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes .................................... 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings .................................. 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings ....................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings .............................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup ......................................................................... 3-25

Setting Crossover Points ...................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters ................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration ......................................................... 3-36

Manual Calibration ............................................................. 3-53

I/O Config............................................................................... 3-60

Display Setup .......................................................................... 3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ..................................................... 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup ................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup............................................................. 3-68

Trigger Setup .......................................................................... 3-70

Tuner Setup ............................................................................ 3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ........................... 3-73

Lock Options........................................................................... 3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION ................................................................. 3-80 iii

Introduction

Audio Controls

Audio Controls ..........................................................................4-2

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets .............................................................................5-2

Mode Adjust

Mode Adjust..............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation .........................................................6-2

Preferred Listening Mode Selection ........................................ 6-3

MODE and BUTTONS ................................................... 6-3

Listening MODE SELECTION BUTTONS ................................. 6-3

Listening Mode Descriptions......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions ......6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships ..............................................6-47

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting ........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance.................................................................7-4

Lexicon

Restoring Factory-Default Settings .............................................7-4

Appendix A

Specifications ............................................................................A-2

Declaration of Conformity .........................................................A-4

Appendix B

Menu Tree.................................................................................B-2

Appendix C

Remote Control Programming.................................................. C-2

Device Activation ...................................................................C-2

Macro Operations .................................................................C-3

Remote Programming Overview ............................................C-4

Programming Macro Buttons ..............................................C-10

Three-digit Preprogrammed Codes......................................... C-18

Appendix D

Installation Worksheet .............................................................. D-2 iv

1

Getting Started

About the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2

Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Product Registration ................................................................... 1-5

Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6

Getting Started

ABOUT THE RV-8

Thank you for purchasing the RV-8 Receiver, an 8-channel audio and video control center with independent zone monitoring that provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones at the same time. The RV-8 includes eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio, eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video or three component video input connectors. The analog connectors can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.

The RV-8 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that is designed to achieve high levels of power and performance.

Equipped with a toroidal power transformer, the amplifier also provides thermal and DC protection.

The RV-8 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions, allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 preset stations, can receive elements of the Radio Data System (RDS) broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-8 also includes a phono input.

Inside and out, the RV-8 is designed for possible future developments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable of performing configuration downloads and flash memory software upgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.

The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.

More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-8 features the latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed Logic 7

® decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and

5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.

Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7

1-2

Lexicon

decoding is widely regarded as the finest available. A Logic

7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available when using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source is present, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using

LOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create a headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround sound, while preserving the original stereo image.

In addition to Logic 7, the RV-8 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/24, DTS neo:6,

DTS-ES, THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2 certification guarantees that the RV-8 meets the highest THX

® specifications.

T h e R V- 8 a l s o o f f e r s L I V E ! ( L e x i c o n I n t e l l i g e n t Va r i a b l e

Environment), designed to transform the way your listening room sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the occupants of the room. LIVE! does not (nor is it meant to) work with prerecorded material. LIVE! provides a realistic illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space–ideal for musicians wishing to practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue.

LIVE! is a unique, sophisticated reverberation system that uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to enhance a room’s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger space. When you engage in normal conversation, it seems as if you are in a large room. When you practice or perform with a musical instrument, it seems as if you are in a concert hall. Choose from one of three customizable presets to create an ambience to liven up a party or amaze your friends.

With two floating-point Hammerhead™ digital signal processing

(DSP) engines, the RV-8 boasts enormous processing power. These

RV-8

powerful processors perform custom Lexicon processing such as

Logic 7 decoding, bass enhancement, dialogue enhancement, auto azimuth, five-speaker enhancement, bass management, highprecision digital crossovers and audio controls. These features are available at sample rates of up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to retain top performance from all sources. In addition, a third DSP engine is dedicated to decoding multichannel compressed audio sources.

The RV-8 is one of the most advanced audio and video control centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital signals, allowing the RV-8 to provide the benefits of precise digital signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZ

D/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,

5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion and internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to the output connectors.

Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.

Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and

Getting Started

level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate playback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio passthrough output is available for recording digital signals with a CD recorder or a similar component.

Complementing its audio performance, the RV-8 features broadcastquality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidth component video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals, while a composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC, PAL or

SECAM video signals. Composite and S-Video sources can be converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) component video. The component video switcher can pass high-definition TV (HDTV) signals and standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Both switchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration or degradation.

Built to professional standards, the RV-8 is designed to serve as the control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination of power, performance, flexibility and technological sophistication.

With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-8 represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face of rapidly emerging technologies.

1-3

Getting Started

Lexicon

HIGHLIGHTS

• Eight channels

• Eight configurable inputs

• Three independent zones

• Integrated 7-channel amplifier with thermal and DC protection and toroidal power transformer

• Compatible with 2

Ω

speaker impedances

• AM/FM stereo radio tuner

• RDS

• Phono input with 2-channel analog bypass path

• Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors

• Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog stereo audio input connectors

• Auto switching between digital and analog audio input connectors

• Headphone output with LOGIC7 processing

• Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom processing

• Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio sources

• Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio input connectors

• One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio output connectors

• 24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all audio channels

• Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs; one fixed, one variable

• One set of analog Zone 3 outputs, variable level

• Broadcast-quality video switching

• Video up conversion from S-video/ composite to component video

• Automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output levels

• Three component video input connectors with full HDTV compatibility

• Five composite video input connectors

• Five S-Video input connectors

• One component video output

• Logic 7 decoding

• Two 32-bit DSP engines

• LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable

Environment)

• Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro

Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding

• DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES

(discrete and matrix) decoding

• THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding

• THX Ultra2 certification

• RS-232 control

• Two trigger output connectors

• Rear-panel IR input connector

• Two microphone input connectors

• Two internal expansion slots

• Removable access panel

• Flash memory software upgrade capabilities

• Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit

• IR preprogrammed/learning remote control with LCD display

• Maximum volume level

1-4

RV-8

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register the RV-8 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.

Register online at www.lexicon.com or complete and return the product registration card attached to the back cover of this user guide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

The RV-8 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and to other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.

D

O

install the RV-8 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or shelf. The RV-8 can also be installed in a standard 19-inch equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an authorized Lexicon dealer.

D

O

select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.

D

O

N

OT

expose the RV-8 to high temperatures, humidity, steam, smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-8 near radiators or stacking the RV-8 over other heat-producing equipment such as a power amplifier.

D

O

N

OT

install the RV-8 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable

TV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might cause interference.

D

O

N

OT

place the RV-8 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8 with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.

Getting Started

D

O

N

OT

place the RV-8 on a windowsill or any location exposed to direct sunlight.

D

O

N

OT

obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper operation.

D

O

N

OT

install the RV-8 on a surface that is unstable or unable to support all four feet.

CAUTION!

Before moving the RV-8, power the unit off using the rearpanel power switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

1-5

Getting Started

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION

The remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without leaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the

RV-8. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

To replace the remote control batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control.

2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).

3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).

4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).

5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).

4

2

1 3

1-6

2

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2

Rear-Panel Overview ................................................................... 2-6

Tuner Overview ........................................................................ 2-10

Selecting a Station...................................................................................2-10

Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10

Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10

Scan Mode ..............................................................................................2-11

Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11

Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11

Editing Presets .........................................................................................2-12

Autoload .................................................................................................2-12

Amplifier Overview ................................................................... 2-12

Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output ......................................2-13

Headphone Overview ............................................................... 2-13

Remote Control Overview......................................................... 2-14

Operation Considerations ........................................................................2-14

MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14

Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14

Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15

Remote Control Buttons ..........................................................................2-17

Command Matrix ....................................................................................2-18

Understanding the Zones ......................................................... 2-28

Two-Line Status ........................................................................ 2-28

STATUS Menus ......................................................................... 2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters ...................................................... 2-35

Basic Operation

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

1

2 3 4

5 6 7

Lexicon

2-2

8

9 10

11

12

13 14

15

16

RV-8

1 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening mode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active, the display will show the frequency, band, listening mode and volume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display for messages and menus, one line at a time.

Note:

Power is still supplied to the RV-8 when standby mode is activated.

2 IR RECEIVER

The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-8 remote control. There are three associated LEDs.

• The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is received.

• The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.

• The blue LED lights when the RV-8 is powered on and activated

– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF.

Red LED

Blue LED

Amber LED

Basic Operation

3 VOLUME KNOB

Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.

To adjust the Main Zone volume level:

Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease volume level

VOLUME -34db

in 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graph indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is

–80 to +12dB.

To adjust the Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level:

1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2 or Zone 3 input selection button that corresponds with the current input source. For instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1 input, press and hold the DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.

2. While holding the desired zone input selection button, rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB increments.

The corresponding horizontal graph appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2 or

Zone 3 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.

3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level has been set.

Note:

When RV-8 output levels have been properly calibrated, the +0dB volume level setting corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).

2-3

Basic Operation

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW

(continued)

4 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input is selected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone input selection button activates the corresponding input in the

Main Zone. Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Zone 2 or Zone 3 input is selected.

5 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input is selected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. The

Main Zone and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 3 input is selected.

6 ZONE 3 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 3. When an input is selected, a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When Zone 3 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 3 input selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 3. The

Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 2 input is selected.

7 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS

Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies, selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling of

2-4

Lexicon

presets. See “Tuner Overview” on page 2-10 for additional

information.

8 STANDBY BUTTON

Toggles the RV-8 between on and standby. When the RV-8 is powered on, pressing this button places the RV-8 into standby and lights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-8 when in standby. When the RV-8 is in standby, pressing the button turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous operating session.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWN

OUT!! PRESS STANDBY message. To turn the unit on, use the

S TA N D B Y b u t t o n . F o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e “ P O W E R

MANAGEMENT” on page 3-3.

9 CHANNEL STATUS LEDs

Each amplifier channel has a blue LED on the front panel that is illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem with an amplifier channel, the corresponding LED will turn off. See

“Amplifier Overview” on page 2-13 for additional information.

10 MODE and BUTTONS

Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous ( ) or next ( ) available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the

MODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “Listening Mode Activation” on page 6-2 for more information.

RV-8

11 MUTE BUTTON

Mutes or restores the RV-8 Main Zone volume to its original level. Press the Mute button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mute button again to restore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels.

Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, the

RV-8 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or listening modes. The amber Mute button LED lights whenever mute is activated.

12 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON

Deactivates the Main Zone.

13 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON

Deactivates Zone 2.

Basic Operation

14 ZONE 3 OFF BUTTON

Deactivates Zone 3.

15 TUNE/SEEK BUTTONS

Allow for manual or automatic tuning of the AM/FM stereo radio tuner.

.

16 HEADPHONE OUTPUT

Features multiple listening modes including LOGIC7 headphone processing. The headphone output follows the signal selected in the M ain Zo ne. When headphones are plugged into the headphone output, all Main Zone amplifier outputs are muted. If amplifier outputs 3 and 7 are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3, they remain unmuted. The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted when headphones are plugged in. Preamplifier outputs for

Zone 2 and Zone3 remain unmuted. See “Headphone Overview” on page 2-14 for additional headphone information. Headphone

listening mode information starts on page 6-34.

2-5

Basic Operation

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

1 2

3

4

5

6 7 1

Lexicon

_

+

_

+

8

9

10 11

12

13

14

15

16 17 18 19 20

CAUTION!

Never make or break connections to the RV-8 unless the RV-8 and all associated components are powered off.

2-6

RV-8

1 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS

Provide audio outputs to the speakers. The Center channel output and all Right channel outputs are located on the left-hand side of the rear-panel. All Left channel outputs are located on the righthand side of the rear-panel. This organizaion facilitates making speaker connections. The amplifier binding posts accommodate the following connectors:

• standard 0.75-inch banana plugs

• size 10-12 gauge spade connectors

• up to 10-gauge bare wire

See page 2-13 for additional amplifier information.

2 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. Five composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, and five S-Video connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5 are available.

3 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled Audio 1 to 8 are available. Connectors labeled 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be configured as 5.1-channel connectors.

When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone, input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the following table. When a 5.1-channel analog source is

Basic Operation

present in the Main Zone, only the Front (L) and (R) input signals are sent to the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. If the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the 5.1 analog

source is sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. See “ZONE2 in

Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for additional information.

Input Connector

(L)

(R)

(C)

(SUB)

(LS)

(RS)

Output Connector

Front L

Front R

Center

Subwoofer

Side L and Rear L

Side R and Rear R

4 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

Three component video input connectors labeled Component Video 1 to 3 are available for use in the Main Zone and have full HDTV compatibility. The ultra-wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts any analog component or RGB video input type. The component

video connectors are not available for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

5 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video output in the Main Zone. Two composite video connectors, two S-Video connectors and one component video connector are available.

2-7

Basic Operation

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW

(continued)

6 ZONE 2 VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video connector and one S-Video connector is available. Alternatively, these connectors can be used to connect a video recording device.

Note:

• Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or S-Video source is present.

• S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is present.

component video source is present.

7 ZONE 2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two pairs of connectors, one labeled “Fix” and the other labeled “Var” are available. These connectors can also be used to connect a recording device. For recording, use the output connector labeled “Fix,” which provides a fixed output level of +0dB. If output level adjustment is needed, use the output labeled “Var” and adjust the Zone 2 volume.

Note:

When using an analog input source, the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio outputs are approximately 2dB lower than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/

R. When using a digital input source, the Zone 2 audio outputs are approximately 6dB higher than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/R.

This is to accommodate THX level requirements.

Lexicon

8 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS

Provide two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radio tuner.

9 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS (S/PDIF)

Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone or Zone 2. Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are available. Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and

96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.

10 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS

Provides microphone input for automatic calibration.

11 PHONO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide a phono level input, which can be assigned to any of the eight

RV-8 inputs. A 2-channel analog bypass path is available (with RIAA curve). A ground connector is also provided. The phono input is optimized for moving magnet phono cartridges.

12 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide 12V DC output to control connected components. Two trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal block. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is powered on, and deactivated when the RV-8 is powered off from the rear panel or by

2-8

RV-8

putting the RV-8 into standby. The trigger output connector

(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See

“Trigger Setup” on page 3-70 for more information.

13 RS-232 CONNECTORS

The RS-232 serial connector (1) provides serial control and is used to perform configuration downloads and flash memory software upgrades. The RS-232 connector (2) is reserved for future developments.

14 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.

15 IR IN CONNECTOR

Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.

One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeve connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.

16 ZONE 3 AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio/video output in Zone 3. One stereo analog audio output (variable level) is available and can derive its source from a variety of analog sources. One composite video output is available and can derive its source from any composite or S-video source.

Basic Operation

17 ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

(S/PDIF)

Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) connector is available.

18 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL

Reserved for future developments.

19 AC INPUT CONNECTOR

Provides power to the RV-8 through the supplied power cord.

20 POWER SWITCH

Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC

Input connector to the RV-8. The I and O positions represent “on” and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-8 is powered on, the front-panel Standby button or remote control On button can be used to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-8 is powered off, standby mode is not available.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWNOUT,

CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rearpanel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switch has no effect.

2-9

Basic Operation

TUNER OVERVIEW

The RV-8 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front panel displays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode and volume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified by the preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:

WABC/90.90 FM or Preset 02/10.30 AM. Two antennas are supplied with the RV-8: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At a minimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure consistent tuner performance.

The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio Data

System (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now with limited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcasting digital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDS option is active and RDS data is received, the RV-8 tuner displays the identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate station frequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text) that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,

see “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72.

SELECTING A STATION

Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.

To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button or select the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. See

the “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72 for more information.

Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the front-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between the

AM and FM frequency bands.

Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radio station: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.

2-10

Lexicon

DIRECT STATION ACCESS

To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either the front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency.

To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:

1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.

2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, to load FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, press the AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.

Note:

When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered, the RV-8 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status message to “Setting Frequency.”

TUNE/SEEK ACCESS

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or remote control ( / ) to navigate to the next available frequency. For example, if the currently loaded frequency is

101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek button to load 101.9FM. Press the

Tune/Seek button again to load 102.1FM, and so on.

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or remote control ( / ) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.

Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuner is having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See

“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.

RV-8

SCAN MODE

Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for two seconds on each station before scanning to the next one.

To enter Scan Mode:

Press and hold the front-panel ( / ) or remote-control (

Tune/Seek buttons until SCAN or SCAN is displayed.

/

To stop scanning:

Press either Tune/Seek button.

)

LOADING PRESETS

To load a preset:

Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel or remote-control number buttons.

A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches over to Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status message changes to “Setting Frequency.”

To skip through available presets in order:

Press the remote-control or button. For example, if preset 1 is loaded and the button is pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 2 (or the next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the button is pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset).

Note:

This feature is only accessible via the remote control.

Basic Operation

SAVING PRESETS

The RV-8 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. The presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It is possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each bank. Storing presets on the RV-8 can be accomplished from either the front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical.

To save a station as a preset on the RV-8:

1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A status message displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel

(and on-screen) display.

2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded frequency as the corresponding preset.

For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset number 1.

Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset number to the third digit entered.

Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.

NAMING PRESETS

Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In the

US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what the broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and

Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program

Service (PS) name.

If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults to

PresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.

2-11

Basic Operation

For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC, then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does not broadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 in the menu.

EDITING PRESETS

It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-8.

To edit the preset name:

1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNER

PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 contains presets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.

2. Select the page containing the desired preset.

A list of presets appears.

3. Select the desired preset.

The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters

(or PS), frequency, and band.

The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:

• Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.

• Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset name can be up to eight characters long.

• Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band information from the preset.

See “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2 for additional information.

Lexicon

AUTOLOAD

The RV-8 can automatically scan and store presets. This can be

accomplished only from the remote control. See “Tuner Setup

(continued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.

To start autoloading:

1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUP menu.

2. Press menu to start AUTOLOAD.

2-12

RV-8

AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW

The RV-8 features a 7-channel power amplifier with 140W per channel. The RV-8 can be configured so that all amplifier channels are dedicated to the Main Zone or so that outputs 3 and 7 (labeled

Rear Right and Rear Left) are used for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Heavy duty gold plated 5-way binding posts are provided for speaker connections.

The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection for each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature of the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific channel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temperature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors are protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by the output voltage, while DC protection prevents DC and frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers. Dedicated channel status LEDs are located on the front panel to provide at-aglance viewing of channel status at all times. If the main power transformer temperature exceeds 100°C, the transformer will deactivate, all channel status LEDs will no longer be lit and the red standby LED will flash rapidly. Once the transformer has cooled, it automatically resets and the amplifier operates normally; the channel status LEDs turn back on, and the red standby LED is no longer lit.

The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of performance and sound quality. In addition, THX Ultra2 certification ensures that the amplifiers meet the highest standards set forth by

Lucasfilm's Home THX division.

Basic Operation

AMPLIFIER CHANNEL STATUS

Each channel has a blue Channel Status LED on the front panel that is illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem with an amplifier channel, the LED will turn off.

MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT

The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires, banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When using bare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into the top of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The same procedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugs should be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.

Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedance connections between the amplifier and the speakers. Observe correct speaker polarity.

CAUTION!

Do not connect the outputs of one channel to the outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers.

2-13

Basic Operation

HEADPHONE OVERVIEW

Headphones can be connected to the RV-8 via the Headphone output on the front panel. The headphone output follows the signal selected in the Main Zone. If the Main Zone source is multichannel, a downmix of the source is sent to the headphone output. LOGIC7 headphone processing is also available for stereo or multichannel sources. To listen to a stereo source without enhanced processing, set the 2-CH parameter in the INPUT SETUP menu to the

2-CHANNEL listening mode. When headphones are plugged into the headphone output, all amplifier outputs are muted (including outputs 3 and 7, unless they are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3). The

Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted. Preamplifier outputs for Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain unmuted. Use the frontpanel volume knob or the remote-control Volume Up/Down buttons to adjust the headphone output level.

When the headphones are plugged into the headphone output, the volume defaults to the HEADPHONE parameter value selected in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. When the headphones are unplugged, the volume defaults to the value of the MAIN PWR ON

parameter in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. See page 6-34

for headphone listening mode descriptions.

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 remote control provides full operation of the RV-8, including commands, such as menu navigation, that are not available from the front panel. It is also designed to provide control for the entire home theater system. This section provides a brief over view of the remo te control. For detailed operation/ programming instructions and manufacturing codes, refer to

Appendix C.

OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS

The following factors can improve or impede remote control operation.

Note the following before operating the RV-8 remote control:

• The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panel

IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.

• For optimal performance, position the remote control at a

30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m) from the RV-8. Placing the RV-8 inside a smoked glass cabinet will reduce the remote control range.

• Remote controls for different components can interfere with one another. Avoid using remote controls for different components at the same time.

• Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.

2-14

RV-8

MAIN MENU

Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main menu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIO

CONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.

M A I N M E N U

M O D E A D J U S T

A U D I O C O N T R O L S

T U N E R P R E S E T S

S E T U P

MENU NAVIGATION

Use the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive menu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates the navigation commands that the remote-control buttons perform when the Main Zone command bank is activated.

Note:

The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10 and RT-20 disc players.

Basic Operation

MENU ITEM SELECTION

Use the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to select menu items.

To select a menu item on the open menu:

1. Press the remote-control and arrows to highlight the desired menu item.

2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected, another menu opens. If a parameter is selected, a parameter drop-down menu or horizontal graph opens.

Arrow Navigation Functions

• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu arrow to select the highlighted menu item.

• When no menus are open, press the Menu arrow to open the MAIN MENU.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu arrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.

• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu arrow button performs no function.

• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu arrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu and arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screen display. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s top and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.

2-15

Basic Operation

MENU OPTIONS

Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.

M A I N M E N U

M O D E A D J U S T

A U D I O C O N T R O L S

T U N E R P R E S E T S

S E T U P

S E T U P

I N P U T S

S P E A K E R S

I / O C O N F I G

D I S P L AY S

V O L U M E C O N T R O L S

T R I G G E R

T U N E R S E T U P

L O C K O P T I O N S

L I V E ! C A L I B R AT I O N

P O W E R M A N A G E M E N T

PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS

Selecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that contains a list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting the

CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a drop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.

ON

OFF

D I S P L AY S E T U P

O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY

F R O N T P A N E L D I S P L AY

A / V S Y N C D E L AY

C U S T O M N A M E

E D I T C U S T O M N A M E

O F F

O F F

To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:

1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control and arrows to scroll upward and downward through the complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

2-16

Lexicon

2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter name, press the arrow to accept the setting and close the drop-down menu.

HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS

Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The bar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter setting falls within the entire parameter range.

For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from the

DISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below, which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.

D I S P L AY S E T U P

O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY

F R O N T P A N E L D I S P L AY

OFF, 1 to 60ms

E D I T C U S T O M N A M E

To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:

1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control

and arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the designated increments. The setting appears to the right of the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.

Note:

Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instances are noted throughout this user guide.

RV-8

1

4

6

7

11

12

13

15

16

18

4

5

8

9

10

2

3

14

17

Basic Operation

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. SYSTEM POWER OFF

2. Displays the name of the selected device.

3. POWER ON

4. Device and function buttons

5. Light

6. Displays page number/currently selected device

7. LCD page change

8. FAVORITE

9. HOME menu

10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)

11. Previous channel

12. VOLUME (+/-)

13. MUTE

14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF) for VCR, DVD and CD

15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)

16. DISPLAY/AM/FM

17. ENTER/SAVE

18. MACRO buttons

2-17

Basic Operation

1

3

4

5

6

7

2

8

Lexicon

COMMAND MATRIX

The command matrix describes the commands that the remote control buttons perform when each command bank is active.

BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

1

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

2

Activates the RV-8.

3

Displays the MAIN Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Main

Zone.

Displays the

Main Zone

Status.

4

Displays the Zone 2 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 2.

Deactivates the

Main Zone.

Selects the Dolby

Digital listening mode family.

Selects the DTS listening mode family.

5

Displays the Zone 3 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 3.

Selects the Tuner input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the THX listening mode family.

6

Displays the DVD1 command bank, which includes commands that control DVD1.

Selects the

DVD1 input for the Main Zone.

Toggles between the current listening mode and the 2-

CHANNEL listening mode.

7

Analog Bypass

Toggle.

Displays the Zone 2

Status.

Toggles RV8 between

5 speaker and 7 speaker modes.

Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

Main Zone BALANCE to the left.

Selects the Tuner input for Zone 2.

Sets the Main Zone

Volume level to

-15dB.

Selects the DVD1 input for Zone 2.

Shows status menu for current Main Zone input stream.


STAT2 button: see

page 2-29 for more

information.

Activates the RV-8.

8

Displays the DVD2 command bank, which includes commands that control DVD2.

Selects the

DVD2 input for the Main Zone.

Displays the SAT command bank, which includes commands that control the Satellite box.

Selects the SAT input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7 FILM listening mode.

Selects the

Satellite input for

Zone 2.

Reserved for future expansion.

2-18

RV-8

5

6

7

1

3

4

Basic Operation

2

8

BUTTON

1

ZONE3 PAGE1

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

ZONE3 PAGE2

2

3

Activates the RV-8.

4

5

6

7

8

DVD1 PAGE1


DVD1 PAGE2

Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.

Displays the Status of

Zone 3.

Deactivates Zone 3.

Selects the TUNER input for Zone 3.



Selects the Satellite input for Zone 3.

Resets the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu BASS,

TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameter to +0.0dB.

Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone BASS parameter in.5dB increments.

Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Top menu.

Opens and closes the

RT-10 or RT-20 Video

Adjust bar.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Angle bar.

Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TREBLE parameter in.5dB increments.

Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter in.2dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 random playback.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 repeat playback.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 condition memory mode.

Deactivates AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS parameter.


Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 A-B repeat playback.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Setup menu.


RT-20 last memory playback.

Creates up to five shortcuts for frequently adjusted RT-10 or RT-20

Setup menu parameters.

2-19

Basic Operation

13

16

Lexicon

9

10

11

12

14

15

BUTTON HOME

MAIN

PAGE1

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

9

Selects the VCR command bank, which includes commands that control the VCR.

Selects the VCR input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7

Music listening mode.

Selects the VCR input for Zone 2.

Adjusts the Audio

Controls menu Main

Zone BALANCE parameter to the right.

10

Selects the TV command bank, which includes commands that control the TV.

Selects the TV input for the

Main Zone.

11

Selects the CD command bank, which includes commands that control the CD player.

Selects the CD input for the

Main Zone.

12

Selects the Phono command bank, which includes commands that control the associated device.

Selects the

Phono input for the Main Zone.

Selects the L7 TV listening mode.

Selects the L7

Music Surround listening mode.

13

N/A Selects Page 2 of the Main Zone command bank.

Selects Page 1 of the Main Zone command bank.

14

Selects the Home command bank.

Selects the TV input for Zone 2.

Sets the Main Zone volume level to

-30dB.

Selects the CD input for Zone 2.

Toggles between setting the input to auto, analog or digital.

Selects the Phono input for Zone 2.

Selects Page 2 of the Zone 2 command bank.

Toggles the Setup

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY parameter.

Deactivates the RV-8.

Selects Page 1 of the

Zone 2 command bank.

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

15

16

History-dependent* Increases the Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments.

Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB increments.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-20

RV-8

13

16

Basic Operation

9

10

11

12

14

15

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1

9

10

11

12

13

Selects the VCR input for Zone 3.

Selects the TV input for

Zone 3.

Selects the CD input for

Zone 3.

Selects the Phono input for Zone 3.

Displays Zone 3 Page 2 command bank.

Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu BASS parameter in .5dB increments.

Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

TREBLE parameter in

.5dB increments.

Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter level in .2dB increments.

Closes certain Setup menus without saving the changes.


RT-20 display mode.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Subtitle bar.

Activates the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS parameter.

Displays Zone 3 Page 1 command bank.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Audio bar.

Displays DVD1 Page 2 command bank.

DVD1 PAGE2

Activates and deactivates the RT-10 or

RT-20 rear- panel video output connectors.

Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters.


RT-20 search mode.


RT-20 program mode.

Displays DVD1 Page 1 command bank.

14

Displays the Home command bank.

15

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

16

Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments Increases RV-8 Main volume level in 1dB increments

2-21

18

17

19

22

Basic Operation

Lexicon

20

21

23

24

BUTTON

17

HOME

History-dependent*

MAIN

PAGE1


Decreases Main Zone volume level in

1dB increments.

Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB increments.

18

History-dependent* Toggles between fully muting Main

Zone volume level and restoring Main

Zone volume level to its original level.

Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

BALANCE and FADER parameters.

19

History-dependent* Toggles between muting Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 2 volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume level to its original level.

20

History-dependent* Scrolls upward through listening modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the front.

21

History-dependent* Scrolls downward through listening modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the back.

22

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press to skip back to next available preset.

23

History-dependent* Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.

24

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press to skip forward to next available preset.



2-22

RV-8

18

17

19

22

Basic Operation

20

21

23

24

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

17

Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments.

Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB increments.

18

Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX

SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when a stereo source is present.

Toggles between fully muting the RV-8 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.

19

Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level.

Toggles between muting the RV-8 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.

20

Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls upward through RV-8 listening modes.

21

Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls downward through RV-8 listening modes.

22

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press to skip back to the next available preset.

23

Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the previous chapter or track.

Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular playback speed.

24

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press to skip forward to the next available preset.

Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the next chapter or track.

2-23

Basic Operation

25

27

28

Lexicon

30

31

26

29

32

BUTTON

25

26

HOME

History-dependent*

History-dependent*

MAIN

PAGE1


If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press to the once to tune next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold until the display shows SCAN or SCAN .

27

28

History-dependent*

History-dependent*

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.

Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

29

30

History-dependent*

History-dependent*

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a

5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

31

History-dependent* Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted parameter setting.

32

History-dependent* When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.



2-24

RV-8

25

27

28

Basic Operation

29

32

30

31

26

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2

25

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press o nce to tune to the next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which searches

26

for the next available radio station. To enter

Scan Mode, press and hold until the display shows SCAN or SCAN .

27

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the

ES decoding parameter, cycling through the

AUTO, ON and OFF settings.

28

Deactivates the output connector labeled

Trigger 1.

DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans through the disc in reverse direction.

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans through the disc in forward direction.

Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.

Stops playback of the loaded disc.

29

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx

Movie when a stereo source is present.

Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.

30

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

31

Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted item. When no menu is open, opens the MAIN MENU.

32

Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu structure.

When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

2-25

33

35

36

38

Basic Operation

Lexicon

39

34

35

37

BUTTON HOME

MAIN

PAGE1


33

History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows the two-line status.

34

History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open, shows the 2-line status.

35

History-dependent* Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.

36

History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM frequency bands.

37

History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

38

History-dependent* Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.

39

History-dependent* Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD screen for easier visibility.



2-26

33

35

36

38

RV-8

Basic Operation

39

34

35

37

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

33

When a menu is open, closes the menu and, in most cases, opens the previous menu.

Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, this button performs no function.

34

When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.

When no menus are open, shows the two-line status.

35

Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.

Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu structure.

Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.

Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or track number selection.

36

If the RV-8 built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM frequency bands.

Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20.

Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.

37

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, saves the currently selected tuner frequency as a preset. Also used to program the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modes and certain playback modes are activated.

38

Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.

39

Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier visibility.

2-27

Basic Operation

UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES

The RV-8 features three zones of operation: the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the primary listening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio and composite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording device. Zone 3 is designed to control analog audio and composite or S-video signals in an additional listening space. The headphone output follows the source selected in the Main Zone. LOGIC7

Headphone processing is available on this output.

The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:

1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simultaneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However, different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot be present in the Main Zone and Zone 2.

2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multichannel audio when all of the following conditions are met:

• The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and

Zone 2.

• A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must be present in the Main Zone.

• The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to

DMIX. See “ZONE2 in Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for

more information.

3. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors will receive

Front L/R when a 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG.

4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix to

Zone 2 is not available.

Lexicon

TWO-LINE STATUS

The two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays whenever the RV-8 detects a change in input source or listening mode.

The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-8 detects a Main

Zone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appears when a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.

The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used to control the length of time the two-line status appears in the onscreen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-line status in the display device screen.

Note:

When the display device is connected to a component video output connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.

MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Main

DVD1 D VOL

FILM

-34dB

Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line status indicates the current input, input source, listening mode and volume level selected in the Main Zone.

ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 2 status

DVD1 ANLG VOL

ZONE 2 -34dB

change. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.

2-28

RV-8

ZONE 3 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 3 status

DVD1 ANLG VOL

ZONE3

-34dB

change. The Zone 3 two-line status indicates the current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 3.

TUNER STATUS

The Tuner status indicates the current frequency, band, listening mode and volume level. The

Tuner status takes the place of the two-line status display for inputs using the built-in tuner.

DVD1 90.9 FM

L7 MUSIC -34dB

STATUS MENUS

Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu for the current input source of the Main Zone, which contains parameters that provide information about the current input source and listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,

Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike most other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened through the selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 button must be pressed.

To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input source:

1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of the

STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the onscreen and front-panel displays.

If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2

Basic Operation

button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.

2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, press the remote-control Menu and arrows to scroll upward and downward through the complete list of available parameters.

Note:

STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be adjusted.

3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu

arrow to close the

STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens, press the STAT2 button or the Menu arrow again to close the

STATUS menu.

STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions

begin on page 2-34. STATUS menu level meters are described

on page 2-35.

2-29

Basic Operation

2CH STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and

R level meters.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

Possible Settings

The current input

The current listening mode

ANLG, PCM

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

2 C H S TAT U S

I N P U T

M O D E

I N P U T T Y P E

S A M P L E R AT E

dB

0

-6

-15

-30

L

-45

R

Lexicon

D STATUS

Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features

L, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

EX ENCODED

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL


The current input


3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

32 to 640kbps

MATRIX, NONE

48kHz

MATRIX, NONE

–27 to +4dB

SMALL, LARGE

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB


D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

EX ENCODED

C R dB

0

-6

-15

-30

L

-45

SL SR

PG1

LFE

D STATUS

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

PG2

2-30

RV-8

STATUS

Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,

SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a

6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel input source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

ES ENCODING

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE


The current input


3/3.1, 3/2.1

754.5 to 1509.7 kbps

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits



S TAT U S P G 1

I N P U T

dB

0

- 6

- 1 5

- 3 0

M O D E

C H A N N E L S

B I T R AT E

E N C O D I N G

L C R S L S R S B L F E

- 4 5

Basic Operation

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE


The current input

5.1a BYPASS

BYPASS


5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE 5.1a BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

2-31

Basic Operation

2CH BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

Lexicon

DIGITAL STATUS

Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE


The current input

2CH BYPASS

BYPASS


2CH BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE 2CH BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE


The current input


---



DIGITAL STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

2-32

RV-8

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE


The current input


ANLG

96kHz


5.1 ANALOG STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

ANLG

96kHz

Basic Operation

LIVE! STATUS

Provides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and R level meters.

Parameter

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE


The current input


MIC

48kHz


2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

DVD1

LIVE! MED

MIC

48kHz

dB

L

0

-6

-15

-30

-45

R

2-33

Basic Operation

STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

2.0 ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded source is not detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect matrix encoding in non-flagged input sources.

BIT RATE

32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps

Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to

640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to

1509.7 kbps.

CENTER MIX LVL

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used during the mixing process.

CHANNELS

3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.

The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (lowfrequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter setting is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surround channels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.

2-34

Lexicon

Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,

3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) input sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.

DIALOG OFFSET

–27 to +4dB

Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.

Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below fullscale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incoming signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the amount of adjustment the RV-8 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.

ES ENCODING

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel

DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround-encoded back channel is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.

EX ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel

Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround

EX encoding is detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.

RV-8

INPUT

Indicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).

INPUT TYPE

ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---

Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the

MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. When the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio source is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphone source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown digital audio source is present.

MIX ROOM

SMALL, LARGE

Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting the

RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is recommended.

MODE

Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).

SAMPLE RATE


Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.

Basic Operation

SURR MIX LVL

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during the mixing process.

WORD LENGTH

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.

STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS

Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left

(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB) channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.

Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu, depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appears when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a bluescreen background.

2-35

3

Setup

Setup ..........................................................................................3-2

Input Setup.................................................................................3-4

Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup ...........................................................................3-25

Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters ....................................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration ............................................................................. 3-36

Manual Calibration ................................................................................. 3-53

I/O Config.................................................................................3-60

Display Setup ............................................................................3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup ....................................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68

Trigger Setup ............................................................................3-70

Tuner Setup ..............................................................................3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ............................................... 3-73

Lock Options.............................................................................3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION ...................................................................3-80

Setup

SETUP

Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTS

SETUP INPUTS

Prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1) and opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change input names, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-4 for more information.

SPEAKERS

SETUP SPEAKERS

Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the

Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup, set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKER

SETUP” on page 3-25 for more information.

Lexicon

I/O CONFIG

SETUP I/O CONFIG

Opens the I/O CONFIG menu, which is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors. It can also be used to configure the amplifier outputs.

See “I/O CONFIGURATION” 3-60 for more information.

DISPLAYS

SETUP DISPLAYS

Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the onscreen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”

on page 3-63 for more information.

VOLUME CONTROLS

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure

Main Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See

“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.

TRIGGER

SETUP TRIGGER

Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. See ”TRIGGER SETUP” on page

3-70 for more information.

3-2

RV-8

TUNER SETUP

SETUP TUNER SETUP

Opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/

FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 for more information.

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP LOCK OPTIONS

Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE

ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from

accidental changes. For more information, see “Lock Options” on page 3-79.

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP LIVE! CALIBRATION

Opens the LIVE! CALIBRATION menu, which is used to perform the

necessary calibration before using the LIVE! modes. See “LIVE!

CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for more information.

Setup

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP POWER MANAGEMENT

ON, OFF

Opens the POWER MANAGEMENT menu, which is used to automatically put the RV-8 into standby mode during brownouts.

When set to ON, the RV-8 detects low voltage levels or a momentary loss of power and puts the device in standby mode. In the event of a power brown out, the RV-8 will display a BROWN OUT!! PRESS

STANDBY message. To turn the unit back on, use the front panel

STANDYBY button.

When set to OFF, the RV-8 will attempt to function during a momentary power loss, however software settings may become corrupt and need to be reset.

When the RV-8 is in standby mode, pressing the button turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous operating session.

3-3

Setup

INPUT SETUP

SETUP INPUTS (INPUT) INPUT SETUP

Lexicon

Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding

INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change the input name, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred listening modes and configure advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

5.1a

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input can be substituted.

All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.

The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.

3-4

RV-8

Setup

CHANGING INPUT NAMES

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

EDIT INPUT NAME

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 NAME EDIT INPUT NAME

Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used to customize the name of the selected input. Custom input names can include up to eight characters.

To customize the name of the selected input:

1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT

NAME drop-down menu.

2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current input name appears on the second line. Using the remote-control and arrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been changed, press the arrow button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when the last character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name.

5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the arrow button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.

The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear in the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against the left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default input name appears in parentheses against the right margin.

3-5

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME


PRESS MENU V TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

Lexicon

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 NAME RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factorydefault input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.

To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:

1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the

INPUT NAME menu.

2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control and arrow buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option.

3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted, press the arrow button to select this option. The message “PRESS

MENU

V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

4. When this message appears, press the arrow button to restore the factory-default name of the selected input and close the message. (Press the arrow button to close the message without restoring the factory-default name of the selected input.)

3-6

RV-8

Setup

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phono input, five composite video, five S-Video or three component video input connectors.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

5.1a

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG

IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel analog audio input levels for the selected input.

Parameter Possible Settings

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO,

TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE

COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

Note:

The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources.

DIGITAL IN

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1

COAX-1 TO 4, OPTICAL-1 TO 4, NONE

DIGITAL IN

Opens the DIGITAL IN menu, which is used to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight digital audio input connectors.

Please note the following:

• When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8 will automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT

parameter to ANALOG (see page 3-17).

• A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next page for information about assigning an analog audio input connector.

3-7

Setup

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

5.1a

S-VIDEO-1

1

5.1a

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

ANALOG-8

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

A

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

B

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

5.1 ANLG (3-5)

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

C

Lexicon

ANALOG IN

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 ANALOG IN

Opens the ANALOG IN menu, which is used to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight analog audio input connectors.

The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input connectors.

• The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIG

menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60).

• The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIG menu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).

• The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/O

CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see

page 3-61).

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO, TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

Please note the following:

• When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8 automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT

parameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-17).

• An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous page for information about assigning a digital audio input connector.

• The PHONO input corresponds to the built-in phono connector.

• The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radio tuner.

• LIVE! cannot be selected until LIVE! CALIBRATION is run. When the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE!, the digital input selection is disabled for this input until a different analog input is selected.

3-8

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

MANUAL

ON

+0.dB

AUTO GAIN

L R dB

0

-6

-15

-30

-45

+0.0dB

ON

OFF

-18 to +12dB

ANLG IN LVL

SETUP INPUTS

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB


Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu, which is used to adjust the 2-channel analog audio input levels for the selected input. Despite attempts at standardization, analog audio sources have a wide range of levels. To compensate for this, the RV-8 allows independent input level adjustment for each of its stereo and multichannel analog audio input connectors, phono input and the internal tuner. Input level

adjustment is not available when analog bypass is on.

Parameter

AUTO

MANUAL

AUTO GAIN*


ON, OFF

–18 to +12dB

–18 to +12dB

* This parameter cannot be adjusted.

Note:

Adjustments made in the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the analog audio input connector assigned for the selected input, these adjustments are automatically applied to the new connector.

3-9

Setup

Lexicon

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

(continued)

AUTO

SETUP

ON, OFF

INPUTS DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO

Provides automatic adjustment of analog audio input levels. When set to ON, the RV-8 automatically monitors and optimizes input levels. When the input signal is too high, the RV-8 quickly decreases input levels to avoid overload. When the input signal is too low, the

RV-8 slowly increases input levels to maximize signal-to-noise ratio and dynamic range.

When OFF is selected, the RV-8 does not automatically monitor and optimize analog audio input levels. Rather, input levels must be adjusted with the MANUAL parameter (see below).

AUTO GAIN

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO GAIN

Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the selected analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN LVL menu

AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of automatic input level adjustment. When the AUTO parameter is OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of manual input level adjustment. (In other words, the AUTO GAIN parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter.)

When the AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment until automatic adjustments have been made.

MANUAL

SETUP INPUTS

–18dB to +12dB

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL MANUAL

Provides manual adjustment of analog audio input levels. When manual adjustments are made, the RV-8 automatically sets the ANLG

IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating automatic input level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments are retained when the AUTO parameter is ON.

Note:

When the AUTO parameter is ON, the RV-8 will not make adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.

LEVEL METERS

SETUP INPUTS


Indicate fluctuating input levels for the selected input. Like the

STATUS menu level meters, ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate input levels for both analog and digital audio sources. However,

ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments affect only analog audio sources.

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels; yellow indicates normal levels; and red indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen background.

3-10

RV-8

VIDEO IN

SETUP INPUTS

COMPOSITE-1 TO 5, S-VIDEO-1 TO 5, NONE

DVD1 VIDEO IN

Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign a composite or

S-Video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its five composite or five S-Video input connectors.

Note:

Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or

S-Video source is present.

S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is present.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

Setup

COMPONENT IN

SETUP INPUTS DVD1

COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

COMPONENT IN

Opens the COMPONENT IN menu, which is used to assign a component video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its three component video input connectors.

Alternatively, COMPONENT IN can be assigned to VIDEO. This will cause the composite or S-Video signal selected for the VIDEO IN parameter to be converted to component input. The NONE setting shuts off the component output.

Note:

When the component is set to NONE, black and blue lines appear on the screen if the monitor does not have auto-sense.


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

5.1a

5.1a

FILM

FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

NONE

DVD1 COMPONENT IN

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

NONE

3-11

Setup

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

Preferred listening modes can be pre-selected so that when a particular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listening mode is activated.

The RV-8 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone input: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the right indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to select preferred listening modes.

DVD1 D MODE

5.1

5.1

5.1

FILM

TV

MUSIC

DIGITAL

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

HEADPHONE 5.1

USE LAST

DVD1 2-CH MODE

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

PRO LOGIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

Lexicon

Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters

2-CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources

D

Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources

5.1a

Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sources

MIC Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)

Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 MODE

FILM

MUSIC

2-CHAN

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

DVD1 5.1a MODE

5.1a

FILM

5.1a

5.1a

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

HEADPHONE 5.1a

USE LAST

DVD1 MIC MODE

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

3-12

RV-8

Setup

When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the corresponding menus on 3-12):

If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the

L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES) source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.

Dynamic Listening Modes

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.

For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and source material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic Listening

Modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below.

2-Channel

Dolby PLIIx + THX

Dolby PLIIx MOV

Dolby PLIIx MUS

DTS NEO:6 + THX

DTS NEO:6 CIN

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

Dynamic modes

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX

THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX

THX MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu

The RV-8 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do

DTS

DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX

DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR

DTS THX MUSIC

DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM

DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC

DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHAN not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes under any circumstances are listed in the table below.

2-Channel

Dolby PLIIx + THX

Dolby PLIIx MOV

Dolby PLIIx MUS

DTS NEO:6 + THX

DTS NEO:6 CIN

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu

Dolby Digital

THX MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DTS

DTS THX MUSIC

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

3-13

Setup

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

(continued)

The Use Last Parameter

When the RV-8 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces the preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lost when switching between inputs.

The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-8 software to

“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.

Once selected, that mode will always be active on the corresponding input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the following example:

1.

Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Press the DVD-1 button.

4. Play a DTS input source.

USE LAST.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.

6. Press the TV button

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display identifies the preferred listening mode.


The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)

2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in the SETUP menu.

When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set

3-14

Lexicon

and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when switching between inputs.

When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when switching between inputs, even when the RV-8 is set to standby as in the following example:

1.

Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 2-CH

USE LAST.

2. Press the MENU button.


4. Play a 2-channel input source.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach PLIIx MOV.

PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.

6. Press the TV button

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display identifies the preferred listening mode.


The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode for the DVD1 input is still PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.

Note:

When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when the RV-8 is set to standby.

RV-8

2-CH

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1

2-CH

Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-8 activates the selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a 2-channel source was present

The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNEL listening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USE

LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7

FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.

The RV-8 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6 listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was present, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Since the DTS NEO:6 listening modes are dynamic, they cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.

Setup

DOLBY D

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 D

Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-8 activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present

The RV-8 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.

3-15

Setup

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

(continued)

Lexicon

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1

Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-8 automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new DTS(-ES) source is present.

When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:

• The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present

• The RV-8 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. Since

DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.

MIC

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 MIC

Opens the MIC MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred listening mode for the LIVE! source. The RV-8 automatically activates the preferred listening mode when a LIVE! input is selected.

When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode (LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED or

LIVE! LARGE) that was activated the last time a MIC source was present.

5.1a

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1 5.1a

Opens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-8 automatically activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog source is present.

When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1a

MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set to

USE LAST, the RV-8 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening mode was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.

3-16

RV-8

CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



MAIN ADVANCED

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side of this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.

INPUT SELECT

ANLOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

FORMAT DETECT

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

ON, OFF

AUTO, OFF

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

A, B

NORMAL, FAST

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

Setup


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a

FILM

FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 MAIN ADV

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

FORMAT DETECT

DIGITAL

OFF

AUTO

ON

OFF

A

FAST

DIGITAL

ANGL

DMIX

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

AUTO

OFF

ON

OFF

A

B

NORMAL

FAST

INPUT SELECT

SETUP INPUTS MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

INPUT SELECT DVD1

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUT

SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input

connector for the selected input. The table on page 3-19 describes

INPUT SELECT parameter settings.

Note:

When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-8 will not select the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio input source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals

(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is powered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-8 automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.

3-17

Setup

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS

(continued)

ANALOG BYPASS

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 ANALOG BYPASS

ON, OFF

MAIN ADVANCED

When set to ON, the RV-8 passes the analog input signal to the Main

Zone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input is sent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the

(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to the

FRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The

(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to the

SIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R and

REAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routes the analog input signal through A/D conversion. This makes it possible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes, crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide multichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected for

Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will be available.

When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOG

BYPASS is disabled.

Note:

If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will be sent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.

Lexicon

S-VIDEO 16:9

SETUP INPUTS S-VIDEO 16:9

AUTO, OFF

DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED

Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some video sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-8 allows anamorphic video input signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enabling compatible display devices to automatically switch between anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.

When OFF, the RV-8 prevents anamorphic video input signals from passing through the S-Video switcher, preventing compatible display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.

3-18

RV-8

Setup

INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL

The RV-8 sends the assigned digital audio input connector to the Main Zone audio output connectors. The RV-8 ignores the assigned analog audio input connector.

ANALOG

The RV-8 sends the assigned analog audio input connector to the Main Zone audio output connectors. The RV-8 ignores the digital audio input connector.

AUTO

The RV-8 toggles between sending the assigned digital and analog audio input connectors to the

Main Zone audio output connectors, based on the input source that is present.

Note the following:

• The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and

DTS(-ES) sources.

• The digital audio input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or

MP3 sources. If an incompatible digital audio source (e.g., MPEG or

MP3) is present, the RV-8 automatically selects the assigned analog audio input connector.

• The RV-8 automatically sets the

INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when the ANALOG IN parameter is set to NONE.

• If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, the

RV-8 will mute.

•

The DIGITAL IN parameter can be used to assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input.


• The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT

SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the

DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.

• The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input.

For example:

• When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital or

DTS(-ES ) source is presen t, th e RV-8 automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.

• When an SACD

TM

source is present, the RV-

8 automatically selects the assigned analog audio input connector.


• The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT parameter to AUTO when both digital and analog audio input connectors are assigned.

• When no compatible digital source is present, the RV-8 automatically selects the assigned analog audio input connector.

• The AUTO setting is recommended for components that generate both digital and analog input signals, such as DVD/SACD players.

3-19

Setup

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS

(continued)

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

S-VIDEO OSD 4-3

ON, OFF

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display device is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set to

ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect ratio, regardless of the incoming signal.

Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and width of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A

16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice as wide as it is high.

When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in the same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.

Note:

The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display device screen when all of the following conditions are present:

• The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.

• An anamorphic video input signal is present.

• A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Video output connector.

Lexicon

COMPONENT OSD

SETUP INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

COMPONENT OSD

ON, OFF

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display device is connected to the component video output connector.

When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewing distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen display, including the two-line status.

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF, the display device using the component video output connector will not show the on-screen display.

3-20

RV-8

LEGACY VIDEO


A, B

MAIN ADVANCED LEGACY VIDEO

When video played back from a VCR is converted to component video by the RV-8, the resulting picture quality depends on both the quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component display device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, A and B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination of the VCR and display device.

Note:

Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a satisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may be achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.

FORMAT DETECT


NORMAL, FAST

FORMAT DETECT MAIN ADVANCED

Controls how the RV-8 reacts when it detects silence in the digital audio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silence when switching between sources.

When set to NORMAL, the RV-8 will not mute when silence is detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.

When set to FAST, the RV-8 will mute when approximately 2ms of continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received, the RV-8 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. This prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal changes. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.

Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format changes.

Setup

ZONE2 IN

SETUP INPUTS

DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX

DVD1 ZONE2 IN

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUP menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input

connector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.

The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.

Note

When using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX.

When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizes

DTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.

For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:

1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.

2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG.

3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-8.

The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and the analog connectors for Zone 2.

3-21

Setup

Lexicon

ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL

• The RV-8 automatically sets the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DIGITAL when the ANALOG

IN parameter is set to NONE.

• The RV-8 sends the assigned

D I G I TA L I N c o n n e c t o r specified in the INPUT SETUP m e n u t o t h e Z O N E 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

• Only PCM digital input sources are compatible with

Z O N E 2 a n a l o g a u d i o outputs. Dolby Digital and

DTS sources are compatible with the Zone 2 digital audio output when the DIG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.

• Audio will not be available in

Zone 2 analog outputs when a Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) or unknown digital input source is present.

ANLG (Analog)

• The ANALOG IN connector specified in the INPUT SETUP menu is sent to the ZONE 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

• Only Front L/R Audio will be available in Zone 2 when one of the 5.1 analog inputs is selected for the Main Zone.

DMIX (Downmix)

• Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.

• To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in the Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio output connectors will mute.

• Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening mode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output connectors will generate mono output signals.

• It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in

Dolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo

® or Replay TV

®

).

• A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS.

Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and

5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the input that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main

Zone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG and

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot be generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in the Main Zone.

3-22

RV-8

ZONE2 ADVANCED

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

Opens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

-18dB to + 12dB

ON, OFF

96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

BLOCKED, ENABLED

Setup


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

5.1a FILM

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

LIVE! MED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

+0dB

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

ANLG IN LVL


-18 to +12dB

ANLG IN LVL

Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-8 applies these adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted when an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter from overloading.

3-23

Setup

DIGITAL BYPASS

SETUP INPUTS DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED DIGITAL BYPASS

ON, OFF

Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.

When ON is selected, the RV-8 passes digital input signals directly to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the original format of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send a multichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. When

OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, Dolby

Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio outputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-8 will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will be sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.

DIG OUT RATE


96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

ZONE2 ADVANCED DIG OUT RATE

Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.

When a value is selected, the RV-8 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters at the selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).

Note:

DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change the sample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.

Lexicon

RECORD


BLOCKED, ENABLED

RECORD

Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is selected, the RV-8 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to prevent feedback loops. However, the RV-8 still passes video input signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED is selected, the RV-8 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2 audio and video output connectors.

3-24

RV-8

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP SPEAKERS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eight audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R

80Hz 80Hz

SR RR

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

M

SUB

L

80Hz 80Hz

SL RL

80Hz

SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS

SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens the CROSSOVER SETUP menu, which is used to configure a custom or THX setup.

Note:

It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or

LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated output levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.

3-25

Setup

Lexicon

CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGES

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

80Hz

R

80Hz

SR RR

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

M

SUB

80Hz

L SL RL

80Hz 80Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

40 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

To configure a custom speaker setup:

• Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of the associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/R parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating of the front speakers.

• Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if

CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover point of the other speakers.

In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover point are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirected to the subwoofer.

Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUB crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Making this selection can result in excessive bass.

3-26

RV-8

Setup

In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Lowfrequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequency signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.

High-Pass Filter

Low-Pass Filter

High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.

Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.

3-27

Setup

Lexicon

THX SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main

Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

80Hz

R

80Hz

SR RR

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

M

SUB

80Hz

L SL RL

80Hz 80Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE RIGHT

BUTTON WILL

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

BGC

ASA

THX 80 Hz

THX 80 Hz

SIDE L/R* THX 80 Hz

REAR L/R THX 80 Hz

SUBWOOFER*

ULTRA2 SUB

THX 80 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

* These parameters cannot be adjusted.

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

80Hz

R

80Hz

SR RR

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

M

SUB

80Hz

L SL RL

80Hz 80Hz

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use

THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:

• Press the arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. The THX SETUP menu will open on the in-screen display.

• Press the arrow button to close the message without configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup.

When a THX speaker setup is selected, the RV-8 applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a 12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R, Center,

Side L/R and Rear L/R output connectors. The RV-8 applies a THX

80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to the Subwoofer output connector.

Notes:

• A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening modes.

• In the THX SETUP menu, only the REAR L/R, THX ULTRA2 SUB,

BGC and ASA parameters can be changed.

3-28

RV-8

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP

or

SETUP

The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and

THX SETUP menus.

SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP

Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setup is selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are set to THX 80Hz.

CUSTOM SETUP Menu

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

80Hz

80Hz

80Hz

80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE



SUBWOOFER*

THX ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

80Hz

OFF

N/A†

APART

FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.

† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

THX SETUP Menu

Default Setting

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

OFF

N/A†

APART


THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

3-29

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

80Hz

R

80Hz

SR RR

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

M

SUB

80Hz

L SL RL

80Hz 80Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

40Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

40Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

S U B W O O F E R

FULL

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

R E A R L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

S I D E L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

C E N T E R S P E A K E R

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

F R O N T L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

Lexicon

3-30

RV-8

FRONT L/R

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ

SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front

L/R output connectors.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the front speakers.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.

SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/R parameter cannot be adjusted.

Setup

CENTER

SETUP

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONE

SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP CENTER

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER output connector.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the center speaker.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.

• When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, select

NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. In this case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/

SACD player to redirect center channel signals.


When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parameter cannot be adjusted.

3-31

Setup


(continued)

SIDE L/R


SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP SIDE L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the side speakers.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.


• When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, select

NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R output connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the

RV-8 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.

Note:

When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround

EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASA parameter and PLIIx modes are not available.


When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is applied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and the SIDE L/R parameter cannot be adjusted.

Lexicon

REAR L/R


SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS CUSTOM SETUP REAR L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the rear speakers.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.


• When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select NONE to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. If the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-8 redirects surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.

Note:

When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,

THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASA parameter are not available.


When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.

To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a

7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate the

Rear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.

3-32

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

40Hz

R

60Hz

SR RR

60Hz

60Hz

C

40Hz

M

SUB

40Hz

L SL RL

60Hz 60Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

40Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

40Hz

OFF

N/A

APART


FULL

3 0 H z

4 0 H z

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

SUBWOOFER

FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

SETUP SPEAKERS SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP SUBWOOFER

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-8 sends a full-range audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-8 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal to the lowest setting of the other speakers.

Note:

When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signals will not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. To redirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

3-33

Setup


(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

TUNER SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

TRIGGER

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGERS

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

40Hz

R

60Hz

SR RR

60Hz

C

60Hz

40Hz

M

SUB

40Hz

L SL RL

60Hz 60Hz

Lexicon


!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL



SPEAKER CONFIGURATION

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

BGC

ASA

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

SIDE L/R* THX 80Hz

REAR L/R THX 80Hz

SUBWOOFER* THX 80Hz

ULTRA2 SUB OFF

N/A

APART

* These parameters cannot be adjusted.

ON

OFF

APART

CLOSE

TOGETHER

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

40 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

THX ULTRA2 SUB

SETUP SPEAKERS CUSTOM SETUP ULTRA2 SUB

or

SETUP

Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Select the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and the

OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. When

SPEAKERS THX SETUP ULTRA2 SUB

ON, OFF set to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can be used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the

BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

3-34

RV-8

BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION)

SETUP SPEAKERS

SETUP SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

BGC

BGC

ON, OFF

Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX

SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When the

BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When set to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio output connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THX

ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compensation cannot be adjusted.

Note:

BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.

Setup

ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY)

APART,

SETUP SPEAKERS

SETUP SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

ASA

ASA

A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recommended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which the rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1

THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX

MUSIC listening mode is activated.

Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).

Note:

ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are present.

When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and

5-channel playback:

• ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.

• The RV-8 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.

3-35

Setup

Lexicon

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

The RV-8 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.

A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.

Automatic Options

MICROPHONE CHECK

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

LEVELS

Details

• Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.

• Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors, allowing the RV-8 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.

• Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual microphone levels.

• Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.

• Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances and output levels.

• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening position and the speaker.

• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

• Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.

• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the desired values.

• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening position and the speaker.

• Activates automatic calibration of output levels.

• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired values.

• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

3-36

RV-8

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

CAUTION!

• The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or irreparable damage to the microphones.

• The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

• Never make or break microphone input connections unless the RV-8 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,

OR standby mode is activated with the front-panel or remote control standby button.


• Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the

Lexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.

Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than those in the kit will produce unpredictable results.

• Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included in this section.

• It is important to read and observe the care and handling documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to ensure optimal microphone performance.

• If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or speaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recalibration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.

Setup

To connect the microphones:

4. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off OR in standby mode.

5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit to the microphone input connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Make sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be referred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes.

6. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

3-37

Setup

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK

Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.

PROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

During the microphone check, position the microphones:

3 As close together as possible

3

Relatively centered between and equidistant from the front left and right speakers

3

In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals

3

At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement during the microphone check. All of the microphones are positioned as close together as possible in an unobstructed location that is equidistant from the front left and right speakers.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Right

Front

Left

Lexicon

3-38

RV-8

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

During the microphone check, DO NOT:

7

Separate the microphones

7

Scatter the microphones throughout the listening space

7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the microphones and the speakers

7

Position the microphones on the floor, on seat cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals

7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m) from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check. The microphones are scattered throughout the listening space rather than positioned as close together as possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left and right speakers.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

Setup

3-39

Setup

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS




• The RV-8 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required level. If the calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the arrow button to cancel the microphone check.

• Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume level, you should set all volume controls for associated components (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to a reasonable level before performing automatic calibration.

When the procedure is finished, the RV-8 automatically reverts to the last volume level that was selected before automatic calibration began.

• During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screen display instead of the front-panel display, as additional information and instructions are available in the on-screen display.

1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option, as shown above.

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


60 Hz

N/A

APART

Lexicon

2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screen display, indicating the importance of proper microphone placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.

3. Press the arrow button to begin the microphone check. The following screens appears in the on-screen display as the microphone check is performed:

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

Appears in the on-screen display while the RV-8 determines the relative noise level of the listening space and the internal noise level of the microphones.


PLEASE WAIT

After eliminating microphones that are not detected or not functioning, the RV-8 calculates an average level for all microphones.

3-40

RV-8

CHECKING MICROPHONES

Appears in the on-screen display while the RV-8 confirms the microphone level calculated during the silence check. To do this, the RV-8 sends alternating


PLEASE WAIT

calibration noise signals to the front left and right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments until the microphones detect the required level. If the signal becomes too loud, press the arrow button to cancel the microphone check.

The RV-8 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate microphones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too high. Then, the RV-8 determines the appropriate output level for the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.

CHECK MICROPHONES Results

Appears in the on-screen display when the RV-8 is finished checking the microphones. This display indicates the individual check results for each microphone.

• An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the microphone check.

• An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass the microphone check.


MIC 1

MIC 2

OK

ERROR

(MICROPHONE)

OK

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

Setup

4. Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired microphone parameter. The RV-8 refers to the microphones according to the input connector to which the microphone is connected.

5. Press the

arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at the bottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.

Refer to the table on the next page for information about all possible microphone check messages.


• The RV-8 retains the calculated microphone level until the

SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed, another microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.

• Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are available. Perform automatic calibration with two microphones that have passed the microphone check.

However, the RV-8 will perform automatic calibration as long as at least one microphone passes the microphone check. In this circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in the primary listening position.

• If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect the microphones from the microphone input connectors. If the microphones are disconnected, you should perform the microphone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.

3-41

Setup

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES

(continued)

Lexicon

Message

(MICROPHONE)

OK

Description

The microphone detected the calibration noise signal without error.

• N/A

Troubleshooting

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

The RV-8 did not detect the microphone during the silence check.

The RV-8 detected the microphone during the silence check. However, the microphone level determined during the silence check was not confirmed during the microphone check.

The microphone level is more than 20dB below the highest microphone level.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

•

The microphone level could not be determined because of excessive room noise in the listening space.

•

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.


The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone

placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are appropri-

ately positioned for the microphone check.



The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the micro-

phone placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are

appropriately positioned for the microphone check.


Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.


POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines whether the RV-8 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a single row, or several listening positions in the listening space.

• Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the next page to position the microphones for automatic calibration. Select the microphone placement that best meets the needs of the listening space.

3-42

RV-8

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position

When calibrating for a single listening position, place the microphones:

3 As close together as possible in a single listening position (the primary listening position)

3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head will be during listening

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3

In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for a single listening position. The microphones are positioned as close together as possible in a single listening position, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that position.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

Setup

3-43

Setup


(continued)

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row

Lexicon

When calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row, position the microphones:

3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head will be during listening

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3

In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening positions in a single row. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a single row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for that row at the expense of a single listening position.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

3-44

RV-8

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows

When calibrating for multiple listening positions in multiple rows, position the microphones:

3

At the approximate spot where the listener’s head will be during listening

3

In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration noise signals

3

At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement when calibrating for multiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for a larger listening area at the expense of a single listening position.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

Setup

3-45

Setup


(continued)

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for automatic calibration

During the automatic calibration, do not:

7 Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space

7

Position the microphones in spots where the listeners’ heads will not be during listening

7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the microphones and the speakers

7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals

7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m) from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check. The microphones are positioned on the floor along the perimeter of the listening space, making it difficult for the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker distances and output levels for the actual listening positions.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

3-46

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

Lexicon

RV-8

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for automatic calibration

During the automatic calibration, do not:

7

Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of the listening positions or space

7

Position the microphones at spots where the listeners’ heads will not be during listening

7

Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the microphones and the speakers

7

Position the microphones on the floor, on seat cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure calibration noise signals

7

Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m) from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement during the microphone check. The microphones are positioned on seat cushions rather than in spots where the listener’s heads will be during listening.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

Setup

3-47

Setup

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


DISTANCES 60 Hz

60 Hz

APART

60 Hz

N/A

COUNTDOWN

Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.

STEP

DISTANCES

DISTANCES & LEVELS

1

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

10

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

Lexicon

LEVELS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.

• If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Press the or arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the arrow button to select

this option. Refer to the table on page 3-36 for more information about automatic calibration options.

• If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicating that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.

If this occurs, go back to “Connecting the Microphones” on page 3-37 and work your way back to this page.

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

NO MICROPHONE

DETECTED

2

The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:

• The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the menu.

arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

• The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the arrow button to skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.

3-48

RV-8

Setup

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

STEP

3

DISTANCES


The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates speaker distances.

• During speaker distance calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter while the RV-8 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter, the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

• Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker distance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-8 does not send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead, the RV-8 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.

These distances can be manually adjusted. See “PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRA-

TION” on page 3-54.

LEVELS

This step does not occur when the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is selected.

4

This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.

The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates output levels.

• During speaker levels calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter while the RV-8 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter, the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

3-49

Setup

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

(continued)

STEP

DISTANCES


5

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

FRONT LEFT

Refer to the table on page

3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.

If there was a DISTANCES calibration error, an AUTO DISTANCES menu automatically displays.

• A value indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure.

• An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated, but at least one error occurred during the calibration procedure.

• Press the or arrow button to highlight the speaker calibration parameter you want. Then press the button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker. A message similar to the one shown above will display.

• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.

• This menu is displayed, but not user accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.


DISTANCES

LEVELS

OK

ERROR

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels, if there was a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP screen is displayed, indicating the results for each calibration procedure.

• An OK message indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure.

• An ERROR message indicates that values were calculated, but at least one error occurred during calibration.

• Press the or arrow button to highlight the desired calibration procedure.

DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS-

TANCES screen shown in the left column of this table.

LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen shown in the right column of this table.

• Press the procedure.

arrow button to select this

• Refer to the instructions in the appropriate column to view more detailed results for each individual speaker.

• If a speaker is highlighted in either the

Distances or Levels menus, the speaker name is displayed.

Lexicon

LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

FRONT LEFT

Refer to the table on page

3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.

If there was a LEVELS calibration error, an

AUTO LEVELS menu automatically displays.

• A value indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure.

• An ERROR message indicates that a value was calculated, but at least one error occurred during the calibration procedure.

• Press the or arrow button to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker. A message similar to the one shown above will display.

• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.

• This menu is displayed, but not user accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.

3-50

RV-8

Setup

STEP

SET DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

0.0ft

R SR RR

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

C

0.0ft

M

SUB

0.0ft

L SL RL

0.0ft

0.0ft

DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

6

Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select the desired speaker distances.

1 Press the arrow button to return to the SET DISTANCES menu.

2 Press the or arrow button to toggle between calibrated speaker distances

(AUTO) and original speaker distances.

The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected values.

3 Press the button to apply the selected values. A confirmation message is displayed to indicate the applied values.

4 Press the button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessible after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is performed as a combined procedure.



DISTANCES

LEVELS

OK

ERROR


PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

AUTO DISTANCES*

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to select speaker distances or levels.

1 Press the arrow button to return to the

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.

2 To select the other calibration procedure, follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise, press the button to return to the

SPEAKER SETUP menu.

*

Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown above as an example. The AUTO LEVELS screen can be substituted.

LEVELS

SET LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

R SR RR

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

C

M

SUB

0.0dB

L SL RL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the desired speaker levels.

1 Press the arrow button to return to the SET LEVELS menu.

• Press the and arrow buttons to toggle between calibrated output levels

(AUTO) and original output levels. The speaker graphics at the bottom of the menu update to indicate the selected values.

• Press the arrow button to apply the selected values. A confirmation message is displayed to indicate the applied values.

• Press the arrow button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is performed as a combined procedure.

3-51

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

(continued)

Message

(SPEAKER)

OK

Description

The RV-8 successfully calibrated the value for the selected speaker without error.

• N/A

Troubleshooting

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

The selected speaker is not present in the speaker setup.

The microphones detected out-of-phase calibration noise signals, but the calibrated value is still accurate.

•

•

The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level.

The microphones did not detect calibration noise signals or the RV-8 could not calculate a value.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected speaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-8 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in the speaker setup.)

Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.

Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-8 does not report this error unless at least half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.

Reflections from room objects could cause this error.

Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.

The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages

3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.


Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.



One or more microphones did not detect calibration noise signals at a reasonable level. The calibrated value could be inaccurate.

•

The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually high level.

•

•

The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level.

•

•

Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.


Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from the selected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

3-52

RV-8

Setup

MANUAL CALIBRATION

SETUP SPEAKERS MANUAL

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances and output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


SPEAKER DISTANCES 40 Hz

LEVELS CALIBRATION 60 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

0.0dB

0.0dB

C

0.0dB

OFF

0.0dB

N/A

APART

M

SUB

0.0dB

L SL RL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

Manual Options

SPEAKER DISTANCES

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

Details

• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.

• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

• Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector, allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.

• Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

• Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

• Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.

• Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.

• Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.

3-53

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION

SETUP SPEAKERS MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCES

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP


LEVELS CALIBRATION

0.0ft

R SR RR

0.0ft

0.0ft

C

0.0ft

0.0ft

M

SUB

0.0ft

L SL RL

0.0ft

0.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

FEET

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

METERS

FEET

To manually calibrate speaker distances:

1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKER

SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above will open in the on-screen display.

2. Press the or arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker distance parameter. Then, press the arrow button to select the highlighted speaker distance parameter.

3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the speaker.

For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected, measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main

Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).

4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the and arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available value.

3-54

RV-8

Setup

PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION

SETUP SPEAKERS MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manually calibrate output levels.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS





R SR RR

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

C

0.0dB

M

SUB

L SL RL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB




INTERNAL NOISE

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-18.0 to +12.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB


• Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrate output levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level calibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailers such as Radio Shack.

• Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location where the listener’s head will be during listening.

• Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, but there is no need to do so.

3-55

Setup

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

SETUP SPEAKERS MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST

Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page, which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration noise signals.

When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:

• Press the arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL

ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically begins.

• Press the button to skip the internal noise test.

During the internal noise test, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level parameters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-8 sends the calibration noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noise signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.

Note:

When the internal noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

Lexicon

To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

3. Press the or arrow button to highlight the desired output level parameter. Then, quickly press the button to select this output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on the previous page will open in the on-screen display and automatic scrolling will stop.

Note:

During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the next parameter, causing the RV-8 to send the calibration noise signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.

4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the or

button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading from the primary listening position.

5. Press to close the parameter. The internal noise test will continue and automatic scrolling will resume.

6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have been set.

3-56

RV-8

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST



Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,

which manually calibrates output levels.

The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted, the RV-8 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source. Refer to the table below for more information about external noise test listening mode activation.

When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, all custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. The listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its factory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, the listening mode returns to its custom condition.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

INPUT SOURCE LISTENING MODE

2-Channel

PLII MOVIE,

Dolby Digital

DTS(-ES)

DIGITAL**

*

5.1-Channel Analog 5.1a BYPASS***

PLIIx MOVIE*

* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE will only load when side and rear speakers are present.

**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section

beginning on page 6-4 for more information.

**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for the

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”.

Setup

Note:

When the external noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

3. Press the or

arrow button to highlight the output level parameter you want. Then press the button to select this output level parameter.

The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3-55 is displayed.

4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the or arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB

SPL Meter reading.

5. After selecting the output level, press the arrow button to close the horizontal bar graph.

6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you want.

3-57

Setup

Lexicon

SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS



The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-8 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting to reproduce low-frequency signals.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

ON

ON

100dB

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

75 to 120dB

Note:

Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.




R SR RR

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

C

M

SUB

0.0dB

L SL RL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB





BASS PEAK LIMITER

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

ON

ON

100dB

!CAUTION!


75 to 120dB

ON

OFF

CAL NOISE

ON, OFF

SETUP

CAL NOISE

SPEAKERS MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS

Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or external calibration source.

To set the CAL NOISE parameter:

• Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set bass peak limiters.

• Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.

Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

3-58

RV-8

LIMITER

SETUP

LIMITER

SPEAKERS MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION

ON, OFF


Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to other speakers.

To set the LIMITER parameter:

• Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequency signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

• Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level, regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

Setup

LIMIT ADJ

SETUP

LIMITER ADJ

SPEAKERS MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION

75 to 120dB


Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector, and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which lowfrequency signals are redirected.

To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:

1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.

The parameter initially sets to 75dB.

2. Press the and arrow buttons to change the parameter value.

The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER parameter is set to ON.

3-59

Setup

Lexicon

I/O CONFIG

SETUP I/O CONFIG

The I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereo connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

REAR PANEL CONFIG

8 STEREO INPUTS

OR

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

OR

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

8 STEREO INPUTS

SETUP I/O CONFIG ANALOG INPUTS

8 STEREO INPUTS

Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors.

When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:

• All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo connectors.

• The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.

• Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1

ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3 and 6, respectively.

3-60

RV-8

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

SETUP I/O CONFIG ANALOG INPUTS 5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio input connectors as five stereo connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five stereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:

• The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured as stereo connectors.

• The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel connector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next column.

• Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

Setup

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

SETUP I/O CONFIG ANALOG INPUTS 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:

• The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.

• The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table at the bottom of this column.

• 2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the

5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main

Zone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.

Input Connector

(L)

(R)

(C)

(SUB)

(LS)

(RS)

Output Connector

Front L

Front R

Center

Sub

Side L and Rear L

Side R and Rear R

3-61

Setup

I/O CONFIG

(continued)

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



MAIN 7.1

SETUP I/O CONFIG AMP INPUTS MAIN 7.1

When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel will be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 are used for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

SETUP I/O CONFIG AMP INPUTS

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input source selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 setting is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing any other button will cancel the change.

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

SETUP I/O CONFIG AMP INPUTS MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 setting is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing any other button will cancel the change.

3-62

RV-8

Setup

DISPLAY SETUP

SETUP DISPLAYS

Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

OFF

OFF, 1 to 60ms

Parameter

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Default

Setting

Possible Setting

Refer to page 3-64

Refer to page 3-66

OFF

OFF

N/A

OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON, OFF

N/A

3-63

Setup

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP

SETUP DISPLAYS ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

Opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



Parameter

STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

Default Setting Possible Settings

2 SECONDS

TOP

NTSC

BACKGROUND ON

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

ALWAYS OFF

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

SECAM, PAL, NTSC

ON, OFF

DISPLAY SETUP



A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME


OFF

OFF


STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

2 SECONDS

TOP

NTSC

ON

ON

OFF

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

Lexicon

STATUS

SETUP DISPLAYS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS

Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zone video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen display remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-8 receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display remains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREEN

DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS

OFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-panel display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

3-64

RV-8

POSITION

SETUP DISPLAYS ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

POSITION

Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near the top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-line status is centered on the display device screen. When set to

BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the display

device screen. Refer to page 2-28 for more information about the

two-line status.

FORMAT

SETUP DISPLAYS ON-SCREEN DISPLAY FORMAT

SECAM, PAL, NTSC

Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the video switcher and the display device. Select the setting that is compatible with the source components and display device.

Note:

The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video output connectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.

Setup

BACKGROUND

ON,

SETUP DISPLAYS ON-SCREEN DISPLAY BACKGROUND

Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON, on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background

(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screen display menus appear over the video input signal.

Note:

When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display will disappear if the display device is using the component video output connector.

3-65

Setup

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUP

Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



DISPLAY SETUP



A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME


OFF

OFF


STATUS

BRIGHTNESS

ALWAYS ON

100%


STATUS ALWAYS ON

BRIGHTNESS 100%

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

ALWAYS OFF

100%, 75%, 50%, 25%

STATUS

SETUP DISPLAYS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF


STATUS

Activates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYS

ON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2

SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-8 receives a command. When set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

100%

75%

50%

25%

Lexicon

Note:

When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the onscreen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2

SECONDS.

BRIGHTNESS

SETUP DISPLAYS

100%,75%, 50%, 25%

BRIGHTNESS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When a setting is selected, front-panel display illumination automatically adjusts to the selected brightness.

3-66

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



DISPLAY SETUP



A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME


OFF

OFF

A/V SYNC DELAY

SETUP DISPLAYS

A/V SYNC DELAY

OFF, 1 to 60ms

Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parameter can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video signal delay.

CUSTOM NAME

SETUP DISPLAYS

CUSTOM NAME

ON, OFF

Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when the

RV-8 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls across the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-8 is activated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.

OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON

OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

SETUP DISPLAYS EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter is set to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

To customize the name of the RV-8:

1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT

CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.

2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, press the remote control

and arrow buttons to change the character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been selected, press the arrow button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when the last character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.

5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the

arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.

3-67

Setup

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP


Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS




MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

Z2 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

-30dB

-30dB

-30dB

-30dB

-30dB

+12dB

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

-30dB

+12dB

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

Parameter

Default

Setting

MAIN PWR ON –30dB

MUTE LEVEL –30dB

Z2 PWR ON

Z3 PWR ON

–30dB

–30dB

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

–30dB

–12dB


LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL




–80 to +12dB

MAIN PWR ON



MAIN PWR ON

Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the

Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session.

Lexicon

MUTE LEVEL


–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTE

MUTE LEVEL

Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the front-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULL

MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, Main

Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.

Z2 PWR ON



ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone

2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

3-68

RV-8

Z3 PWR ON



ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone

3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

HEADPHONE



ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever headphones are plugged in to the RV-8. When set to LAST LVL, the

Setup

headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected when they were last plugged in. When the headphones are unplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.

MAX VOLUME


-80 TO +12dB

MAX VOLUME

Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a value is selected, the RV-8 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the selected value when the current level is higher.

3-69

Setup

TRIGGER SETUP

SETUP TRIGGER

Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the

TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be used to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-8 rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. The connector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector

– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is activated, and deactivated when the RV-8 is deactivated. The trigger output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or program operation.


REMOTE ONLY ON

Program Operation OFF

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

SETUP TRIGGER

REMOTE ONLY

ON, OFF

Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote operation. When set to ON, this connector is configured for remote operation. The remote control play and stop buttons turns the trigger on and off. The RV-8 ignores all other

TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF, the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for remote operation. It can be configured for program operation.

Lexicon

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

CIN

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF

CONCERT HHALL OFF

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

OFF

OFF

PANORAMA OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

OFF

OFF

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO OFF

5.1

FILM

5.1

TV

5.1

MUSIC

SurEX

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

OFF

OFF

OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a STANDARD OFF

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

OFF

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a

OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode names are fixed, meaning these names do not change when certain encoding is present. For instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, or no encoding is engaged.

ON

OFF

3-70

RV-8

PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS

ON, OFF

SETUP TRIGGER (PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)

Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters– except the REMOTE ONLY parameter–are considered program operation parameters. The connector can be associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the same time.

When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and program operation parameters are set to ON, the trigger output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corresponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modes or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated with individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured for program operation, the connector is activated when the corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and listening modes are deselected.

Note:

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



Setup

TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

CIN

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF


CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

OFF

OFF

PANORAMA OFF


OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

OFF

OFF


MONO OFF

5.1

FILM

5.1

TV

5.1

MUSIC

SurEX

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF



5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

OFF

OFF

OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

MUSIC

2-CHAN



5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

OFF

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a

OFF

LIVE! SMALL OFF

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

OFF

OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode names are fixed, meaning these names do not change when certain encoding is present. For instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, or no encoding is engaged.

ON

OFF

3-71

Setup

TUNER SETUP


Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

USA

LOW

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

Parameter

Default

Setting


REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

USA

LOW

N/A

N/A

USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

LOW, MED, HIGH

N/A

N/A

N/A N/A

RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME,

FREQUENCY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

ON

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

ON, OFF

MEDIUM SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

ON, OFF

Lexicon

REGION


USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

Sets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN and

E. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and increments for these regions.

Note:

REGION

The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. It will always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-8 has

USA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHz

being the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowest frequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, if the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it will actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.

3-72

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY RDS NAME

RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

LOW

MED

HIGH

SCAN SENS


LOW, MED, HIGH

REGION

Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set the threshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The default setting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies will tune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED

(medium) or HIGH settings.

TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS

REGION

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

FM LO LIMIT

87.90MHZ

87.50MHZ

76.00MHZ

64.00MHZ

FM HI LIMIT

107.90MHZ

108.00MHZ

91.00MHZ

76.00MHZ

FM INCREMENT

200 KHZ/.2MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

AM LO LIMIT

520KHZ

520KHZ

522KHZ

520KHZ

AM HI LIMIT

1720KHZ

1602KHZ

1720KHZ

1720KHZ

AM INCREMENT

10KHZ

9KHZ

9KHZ

9KHZ

3-73

Setup

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



AUTOLOAD

SETUP TUNER SETUP AUTOLOAD

Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected frequency band.

To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER

SETUP menu and press the right ( ) arrow. The message “PRESS

RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays.

• To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left ( ) arrow.

• AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses the next available preset.

• Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNER button is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOAD will stop.

• To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select that band and restart AUTOLOAD.

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

ON

MEDIUM

ON

PRESS RIGHT

J

TO START AUTOLOAD

Lexicon

Note:

Presets are saved when the unit is powered down. Because the

AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using the

CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channels may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than once since the last CLEAR ALL.

3-74

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



CLEAR ALL

SETUP

TUNER SETUP CLEAR ALL

Clears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press the right ( ) arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT

TO CLEAR

ALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

(Press the left ( ) arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.)

This should be used after all presets have been entered but it is desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if you have moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existing presets and scan for local stations.

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

ON

MEDIUM

ON

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

PRESS RIGHT

J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

TUNER PRESETS

This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER

PRESETS menu. For more information, see “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

3-75

Setup

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



DISPLAY

RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCY

SETUP TUNER SETUP DISPLAY

Identifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of the

OSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDS

NAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDS

NAME.

PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the currently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tuner preset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.

RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which is intended to be used to identify a station or station program. If the

RDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will be displayed.

FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel selected.

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

USA

LOW

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

RDS NAME

PRESET NAME

FREQUENCY

Lexicon

Note:

In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of the

Program Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar to

Radio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You may wish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.

3-76

RV-8

Setup

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



RADIO TEXT


ON, OFF

RADIO TEXT

Activates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented as scrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screen displays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever text the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of the current song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not all stations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio

Text, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.

When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in the scrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finished scrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currently set listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second set of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the beginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

ON

OFF

SCROLL RATE


SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

SCROLL RATE

Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting is

MEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower text scrolling, select SLOW.

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

ON

MEDIUM

ON

SLOW

MEDIUM

FAST

3-77

Setup

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



AUTO FREQUENCY

ON, OFF

SETUP

TUNER SETUP AUTO FREQUENCY

Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out or signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stations broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTO

FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when signal failure is detected.

If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated, the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received.

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

ON

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

MEDIUM

ON

ON

OFF

AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when the following conditions are met:

• The main frequency signal starts to fade.

• The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact match of the currently selected frequency.

• The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength than the currently selected frequency.

• The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.

3-78

RV-8

Setup

LOCK OPTIONS


Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

Parameter

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP


UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

MODES


LOCKED, UNLOCKED

MODES

Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all listening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

AUDIO CNTRL


LOCKED, UNLOCKED

AUDIO CNTRL

Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to

LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to

UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

SETUP


LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP

Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

3-79

Setup


SETUP LIVE! CALIBRATION

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. LIVE! uses a combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space. LIVE! CALIBRATION must be completed before using any of the LIVE! modes.

Notes:

You should run automatic calibration before running LIVE! CALIBRATION.

See page 3-36 for instructions on running an automatic calibration. Any

changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the

SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE! to become uncalibrated.

If power is lost during calibration of LIVE!, previous settings may be lost and recalibration of speaker levels and distances, as well as LIVE! is required.

The Bass, Treble, Tilt EQ and Loudness controls do not function when

LIVE! is running. While LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameters are shown in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu as set to 0. The

LOUDNESS parameter is shown as set to OFF.

LIVE! requires two microphones, available in a kit from your authorized

Lexicon dealer. (If you own the Lexicon four-microphone kit, there is no need to purchase the two-microphone kit. The microphones should be permanently mounted in the listening room. Performing LIVE!

CALIBRATION with microphones other than those in the kit can produce undesirable results.

LIVE! requires that a minimum of four speakers (Front L/R, and either side L/R or Rear L/R) be set up and connected to the amplifier. If no

Lexicon

subwoofer is present, the crossover setting of the Front L/R speakers should be set to FULL.

Proper microphone placement, both during calibration and when running LIVE!, is essential to achieving the desired results. Microphone placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section.

The location of the sound source (piano, guitar, voices, etc.) is not critical. LIVE! compensates for sounds that are closer to one microphone or another.

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

CAUTION!

• The Lexicon microphones require careful handling.

Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones can cause irreparable damage to the microphone.

• The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off or in standby mode.

2. Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and

2 connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Connector 1 is for the left microphone, connector 2 is for the right. Make sure each microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be referred to as 1 and 2, based on the input connector to which the microphone is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes.

3. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

3-80

RV-8

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE!

Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE!

PROPER

microphone positioning for LIVE!

Position the microphones:

3

On or near opposite side walls

3 Approximately halfway between the front and side speakers

3 At an approximate height between the waist and head of a standing person

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other fixtures

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers

Note:

LIVE! can potentially create feedback in the system. The processing is designed to prevent this, but you should avoid placing the microphones too close to speakers.

The illustration to the right provides an example of proper microphone placement during LIVE! calibration and also for permanent location.

Rear

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Setup

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

3-81

Setup

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for LIVE!

When positioning the microphones,

DO NOT:

7

Place the microphones on the front or rear walls

7

Place the microphones near the floor or ceiling

7

Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other fixtures

7

Place the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of any speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of improper microphone placement for LIVE! calibration or for a permanent location.

Rear

Right

Side

Right

Rear

Left

Microphone

Side

Left

Lexicon

Front

Right

Subwoofer

Center

Front

Left

3-82

RV-8

PERFORMING LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



Setup

60 Hz

N/A

COUNTDOWN



10

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN


IN PROGRESS

PLEASE WAIT


CALIBRATION DONE


SIGNAL TOO LOW

To perform LIVE! calibration:

1. Select SETUP LIVE! CALIBRATION as shown above.

2. The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message appears to indicate that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE!

calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the button to cancel LIVE! calibration. Press the button to begin calibration.

3. The countdown display notifies you that LIVE! calibration begins in

10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10-second delay is to give you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 3 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the arrow button to skip the countdown and begin LIVE! calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates LIVE!

calibration when the countdown ends.

When the LIVE! calibration is finished, the LIVE CALIBRATION results screen displays one of the following two messages.

• The CALIBRATION DONE message indicates that no errors occurred during the calibration procedure.

• The SIGNAL TOO LOW message indicates that the microphones failed to pick up sufficient calibration noise signals for calibration to complete.

4. After reading the message, press to continue.

If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appears:

• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 in microphone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

• Examine the speakers and the associated amplifier to ensure that speaker wires are connected and the amplifier is on.

• Run a Microphone Check to determine whether a microphone

has been damaged. See page 3-40 for instructions on check-

ing the microphones.

3-83

4

Audio Controls

Audio Controls ............................................................................4-2

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS

Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the Main Zone audio output connectors and to control the balance of the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE and FADER parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors, including all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs. The

ZONE3 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors, including all Zone 3 inputs.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

L< BALANCE >B

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

OFF









Parameter

BASS

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS


+0.0dB

TREBLE +0.0dB

+0.0dB

OFF

BALANCE

FADER

<|>

<|>

ZONE2 BALANCE <|>

ZONE3 BALANCE <|>

–6.0 to +6.0dB

–3.0 to +3.0dB

ON, OFF

L< to <|> to >R

B< to <|> to >F

L< to <|> to >R

L< to <|> to >R

B< FADER >F

ON

OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

-6.0 to +6.0dB

BASS

AUDIO CONTROLS

–6.0dB to +6.0dB

BASS

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and

Subwoofer. The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings.

TREBLE

AUDIO CONTROLS

–6.0dB to +6.0dB

TREBLE

Controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

The TREBLE Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings.

Note:

When LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, and LOUDNESS controls do not function and the corresponding parameters in the

AUDIO CONTROLS menu default to +0.0dB. The LOUDNESS parameter defaults to OFF.

4-2

RV-8

BASS Parameter Settings TREBLE Parameter Settings

Audio Controls

The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

4-3

Audio Controls

AUDIO CONTROLS

(continued)

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

-3.0 to +3.0dB

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

ON

OFF

TILT EQ

AUDIO CONTROLS

TILT EQ

–3.0dB to +3.0dB

Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub. This parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases, frequencies higher than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases, frequencies higher than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously boosted. The TILT EQ Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ parameter settings.

LOUDNESS

AUDIO CONTROLS

LOUDNESS

ON, OFF

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R,

Center and Sub. When ON is selected, loudness compensation is automatically applied, based on volume level. As volume level increases, the amount of boost automatically decreases. The loudness contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference levels. When OFF is selected, no loudness compensation is applied.

The LOUDNESS Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level is adjusted.

4-4

RV-8

TILT EQ Parameter Settings LOUDNESS Parameter Settings

Audio Controls

The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main

Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front

L/R, Center and Sub.

4-5

Audio Controls

AUDIO CONTROLS

(continued)

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE2 BALANCE

L< BALANCE >R

B< FADER >F

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE2 BALANCE

L< ZONE2 BALANCE >R

BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS

L< <|> >R

BALANCE

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors.

FADER

AUDIO CONTROLS

B< <|> >F

FADER

Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output connectors.

ZONE2 BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS ZONE2 BALANCE

L< <|> >R

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors.

ZONE3 BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS

ZONE3 BALANCE

L< <|> >R

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors.

4-6

5

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2

Tuner Presets

Lexicon

TUNER PRESETS

Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available), frequency and broadcast band is displayed.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

TUNER PRESETS

06

07

08

09

10

01

02

03

04

05

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

Each tuner preset page allows up to 10 preset stations.

EDIT PRESET 1

FREQUENCY

BAND

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

0.00

FM

STATION

LOADED

EDIT STATION NAME

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program Service (PS) name. If RDS information is not available, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is the listed number location in the Preset menu for that position. For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC, then the name for that position is WABC.

To edit a preset, press the menu /

arrows until the desired preset is highlighted, then press the menu

arrow to open the parameters menu for the selected preset.

Parameter

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

5-2

RV-8

LISTEN TO PRESET

TUNER PRESETS PAGE 1 01 LISTEN TO PRESET

Loads the current preset station. Press the menu

arrow to load the station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display

“STATION LOADED.”

NAME

TUNER PRESETS PAGE 1 01 NAME

Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characters long. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9, and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.

Tuner Presets

CLEAR PRESET

TUNER PRESETS PAGE 1 01 CLEAR PRESET

Clears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screen display will display “PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press the menu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.

5-3

6

Mode Adjust

Mode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2

Listening Mode Descriptions .......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47

Mode Adjust

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

* These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker setup and parameter settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

Descriptions for more information.

MODE ADJUST

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX*

PLIIx MOV*

PLIIx MUS*

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1

FILM

5.1

TV

5.1

MUSIC

*

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV*

5.1 PLIIx MUS*

DIGITAL EX*

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM*

MUSIC*

*

*

MUSIC*

2-CHAN*

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

6-2

Lexicon

MODE ADJUST

Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which is used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menu opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.

Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode

for the current Main Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used to customize the selected listening mode. These adjustments are applied when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.

LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION

Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC and analog input sources. The RV-8 allows listening mode selection for all Main

Zone sources. In some cases, the RV-8 automatically activates a listening mode in response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.

Note:

When headphones are plugged into the RV-8, all listening modes are downmixed to two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,

HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described in

detail on page 6-34.

Listening mode activation occurs through:

• the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters

(page 3-12).

•

the front-panel or remote control Mode button (page 2-17).

•

the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).

RV-8

PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION

The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and

MIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.

The RV-8 automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.

MODE AND BUTTONS

The front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can be used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input source. Pressing these buttons scrolls up ( ) or down ( ) through listening modes available for the current Main Zone source.

Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE

ADJUST menu.

For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the

or

arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listening modes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of the Main Zone two-line status.

Dynamic Listening Mode Selection

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and source material with specific encoding is played. All dynamic listening modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode button.

See “Dynamic Listening Modes” on page 3-13 for a complete

listing of dynamic listening modes.

Mode Adjust

LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS

The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used to activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), THX, Logic 7 Music, or Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a

2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is activated. The table below indicates the listening modes associated with each mode family selection button.

Button

L7 F

L7 M

L7 TV

L7 MS

DOLBY

DTS

THX

2-Channel

Sources

Dolby Digital

Sources

DTS(-ES)

Sources

5.1a

Sources

L7 FILM

L7 MUSIC

5.1 L7 FILM

5.1 L7 MUSIC

DTS(-ES) L7 FILM

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC 5.1a L7 MUSIC

L7 TV 5.1 L7 TV MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC L7 MUSIC

SURROUND

5.1 L7 MUSIC

DOLBY PLIIx MOV DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV* MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS NEO:6 CIN MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS(-ES)

DOLBY PLIIx + THX THX UL2CIN DTS THX

DTS THX UL2 CIN

DTS(-ES) THX***

5.1a L7 FILM

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

5.1a THX Sur

EX

* These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker configuration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speakers (but not both), pressing the button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.

** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input source that is present.

*** For ES source.

6-3

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS

Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus are

shown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-39.

L7 FILM

MODE ADJUST

FILM

This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded film sources.

Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase the perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of the listening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders.


AUTO AZIMUTH ON

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

ON

REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

ON, OFF

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

L7 TV

MODE ADJUST TV

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded television broadcast sources.

Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast sources.


AUTO AZIMUTH ON


FRONT STEERING FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

7.0kHz

ON, OFF

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF



OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

OFF, 1 to 30ms




6-4

RV-8

L7 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded music sources.

Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music sources.


VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

+0.0dB

MUSIC

NEUTRAL

ON

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB



ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

7.0kHz

ON, OFF


REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37




Mode Adjust

L7 MUSIC SURR

MODE ADJUST MUSIC SURR

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings that contain added reverb. It is recommended for classical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.

Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon products. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard from all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.



FRONT STEERING MSURR

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB



ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

7.0kHz

ON, OFF



OUTPUT LEVELS

OFF, 1 to 30ms

Refer to page 6-37




6-5

Mode Adjust

DOLBY PLIIx + THX & DOLBY PLII + THX

MODE ADJUST PLIIX +

OR MODE ADJUST

PLII +

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers. Dolby PLII(x) + THX encoding:

• Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

• Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound movements between them.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when the front and side speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded sources. To activate this listening mode, play the 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded source, then select DOLBY

PLIIx + THX using the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded source was present.

Lexicon

Note:

The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Parameter


RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

ON, OFF



6-6

RV-8

DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIE

MODE ADJUST PLIIx MOVIE OR MODE ADJUST PLII MOVIE



Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes:

• Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.

• Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic decoding.

• Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx

Mov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.

Mode Adjust

Note:

The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37



6-7

Mode Adjust

DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSIC

MODE ADJUST PLIIx MUS

OR

MODE ADJUST PLII MUSIC



The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel Dolby

Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBY

PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote control

Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.

Lexicon

Note:

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.


PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

OFF

3

DIMENSION NEUTRAL

SURROUND DLY 10ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37


ON, OFF

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX


0 to 15ms



6-8

RV-8

DOLBY PL + THX

MODE ADJUST PL +

This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources and decodes four channels: three front channels and one mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers. Dolby PL + THX mode:

• Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

• Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound movements between them.

Parameter

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM


ON

Refer to page 6-37

ON, OFF

Refer to page 6-37


detailed descriptions

.

Mode Adjust

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST PRO LOGIC

The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby

Surround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby

Surround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the

L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37



.

6-9

Mode Adjust

DTS NEO:6 + THX

MODE ADJUST +

This mode is designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo film sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are present.

In addition to THX processing, THX re-equalization is applied to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

This listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode. To select this listening mode use the remote control or front-panel Mode button. When the

2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 + THX listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

Parameter

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM


ON

Refer to page 6-37

ON, OFF

Refer to page 6-37



.

Lexicon

DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST CIN OR MUSIC

These modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are present.

These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be assigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of these listening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Mode button. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

Note:

• The RV-8 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listening mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.

The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or

96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.

• The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS button when a 2-channel input source is present.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37



.

6-10

RV-8

NIGHTCLUB

MODE ADJUST NIGHTCLUB

The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections, especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The

NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate small, intimate listening spaces.

The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

Parameter

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

11

ON

5m

196ms


0 to 18

ON, OFF

4 to 20m

30ms to 20.2s

5ms

9.0kHz

+3dB

Refer to page 6-37

–12 to +6dB

Refer to page 6-37

OFF, 1 to 100ms




.

Mode Adjust

CONCERT HALL

MODE ADJUST CONCERT HALL

The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listening spaces.

The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from


Parameter

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

12

ON

20m

1.72s


0 to 18

ON, OFF

4 to 20m

30ms to 20.2s

OFF

2.4kHz

–2dB

Refer to page 6-37

–12 to +6dB

Refer to page 6-37

OFF, 1 to 100ms




.

6-11

Mode Adjust

CHURCH

MODE ADJUST CHURCH

The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long reverberation time relative to their sizes.

The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from


Parameter

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE*

MID RT*

BASS RT*

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

5

ON

20m

1.56s

1.87s

24ms

2.4kHz

–3dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


0 to 18

ON, OFF

4 to 30m

24ms to 24.3s

5ms to 48.6s

OFF, 1 to 100ms


–12 to +6dB

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.



.

Lexicon

CATHEDRAL

MODE ADJUST CATHEDRAL

The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals – with long reverberation time relative to their size.

The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from


Parameter

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE*

MID RT*

BASS RT*

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

12

ON

30m

3.72s

4.47s

23ms

3.1kHz

–8dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


0 to 18

ON, OFF

4 to 30m

24ms to 24.3s

5ms to 48.6s

OFF, 1 to 100ms


–12 to +6dB

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.



.

6-12

RV-8

PANORAMA

MODE ADJUST PANORAMA

The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and matrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.

Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle from the display device.


EFFECT LVL

BASS CONTENT

+4dB

STEREO

LOW FREQ WIDTH +0

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

–12 to +6dB

BINAURL, MONO, STEREO

–25 to +25dB



INPUT BALANCE <|>

CALIBRATION Refer to next column

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37


OFF, 1 to 30ms

L< to <|> to >R



.

Mode Adjust

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

MODE ADJUST PANORAMA CALIBRATION

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT

SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg

LISTENER POS +0

Select PANORAMA CALIBRATION to open the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown to the left, to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. This listening mode must be

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED calibrated to take full advantage of its effects.

For best results, you should center the primary listening position between the front left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated with varying results.

An external calibration source is required to calibrate the

PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo source.

Parameter

SOURCE

SPEAKER ANGLE

LISTENER POS


LEFT & RIGHT RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

30deg 10 to 90deg

+0 -127 to +127



6-13

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LEFT

To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:

1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary listening position.

2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary listening position are properly measured. To do this, select one of the following options.

• Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to have the RV-8 automatically calibrate speaker distances.

• Measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the closest available value.

3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening position is not centered between the front left and right speakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMA

CALIBRATION

LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for the difference using the remote control and arrow

CENTER RIGHT

buttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch. The Left illustration shows the left-of-center position. The Right illustration shows the right- of-center position

4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.

5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.

6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress, set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in the right ear.

7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the

PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound should be perceived to come from all around the primary listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the calibration procedure.

6-14

RV-8

2-CH SURROUND

MODE ADJUST 2-CH SURROUND

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left channel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right for the center. It is recommended for background music.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST 2-CHANNEL

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recommended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and for comparison purposes with other listening modes.

Parameter

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

Default Setting

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37


OFF, –30 to +12dB



.

Mode Adjust

MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST MONO LOGIC

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary

Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

Parameter

EFFECT LVL

ACADEMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

–9dB

ON


3.1kHz

Refer to page 6-37


Refer to page 6-37

–12 to +6dB

ON, OFF



.

6-15

Mode Adjust

MONO SURROUND

MODE ADJUST MONO SURROUND

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends the mono source to all channels.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

MONO

MODE ADJUST MONO

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono sources to the center channel and subwoofer.

Parameter

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

Default Setting

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37


OFF, –30 to +12dB



.

Lexicon

5.1 L7 FILM

MODE ADJUST 5.1 FILM

The 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other decoders.

It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.



RE-EQUALIZER ON

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

7kHz


COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

AUTO, ON, OFF

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37



.

6-16

RV-8

5.1 L7 TV

MODE ADJUST 5.1 TV

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.



FRONT STEERING FILM

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

OFF

REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz


+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB


ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37


AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0dB to +0.0dB



.

Mode Adjust

5.1 L7 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST 5.1 MUSIC

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1

L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.



FRONT STEERING MUSIC

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

OFF

NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz


COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB


ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

OFF

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0dB to +0.0dB



.

6-17

Mode Adjust

THX, THX UL2Cin & THX SurEX

MODE ADJUST

OR

UL2Cin OR SurEX

These modes are designed for 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding. They apply THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization. THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound movements between them. These modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the speaker setup.

The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when activated:

• The THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and THX ULTRA2 decoding is engaged. THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND

EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-flagged

Parameter Setting

SURROUND EX: AUTO

SURROUND EX: ON

SURROUND EX: OFF

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

6-18

Lexicon

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround

EX encoding is detected.

• The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the

SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

• The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX

Surround EX decoding are deactivated.

Note:

Some EX-encoded sources are not flagged, and require manually setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding.

When THX Ultra2 decoding is active:

• Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround field in home theaters.

Input Source

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Dolby Digital (Flagged)

THX SurEX

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2


Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

RV-8

• ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more information.

When THX Surround EX decoding is active:

Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

Parameter Default Setting

RE-EQUALIZER ON

SURROUND EX AUTO

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


AUTO, ON, OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB



.

Note:

The THX UL2Cin listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot

be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.

Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a THX UL2Cin listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

Mode Adjust

THX MUSIC


This listening mode is designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital music sources, and cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the

rear speakers. See “ASA” on page 3-35 for more information. For

best results, place the rear speakers close together in your home theater.


COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37



AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB



.

Note:

The THX MUSIC listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources. Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote control Mode arrow buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a THX MUSIC listening mode if this mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

6-19

Mode Adjust

5.1 PLIIx MOV

MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MOV

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back

7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film sources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz.

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear speakers are present.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

Lexicon

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Parameter

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


AUTO, ON, OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB



6-20

RV-8

5.1 PLIIx MUS

MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MUS

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1

discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music sources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

Mode Adjust

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Parameter

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


AUTO, ON, OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB



6-21

Mode Adjust

DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX

MODE ADJUST DIGITAL OR DIGITAL EX

These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1

discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.

The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding. This listening mode can also be used with other types of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a surround back channel from the other surround channels.

• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX

DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding is detected.

Lexicon

• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the

EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.


EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

AUTO

OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37



AUTO, ON, OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding.


EX DECODING: AUTO

EX DECODING: ON

EX DECODING: OFF

6-22

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

Input Source

5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Flagged)

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Non-Flagged)

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

RV-8

5.1 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST 5.1 2-CHANNEL

This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into

2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.

The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to the Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.

Parameter

CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

MASTER LEVEL

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

Default Setting

+0dB

+0dB

+0

+0dB


–25 to +5dB

–5 to +5dB

–127 to +127

–5 to +5dB

OFF

+0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

–20.0 to +0.0dB

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37

OFF, -30 to +12dB



Mode Adjust

5.1 MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST 5.1 MONO LOGIC

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

Note that:

When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-8 automatically activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.

Parameter

EFFECT LVL

ACADEMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

–9dB

ON


3.1kHz

Refer to page 6-37


Refer to page 6-37

–12 to +6dB

ON, OFF



6-23

Mode Adjust

5.1 MONO SURR

MODE ADJUST 5.1 MONO SURR

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37



Lexicon

5.1 MONO

MODE ADJUST 5.1 MONO

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel and subwoofer.

Parameter

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

Default Setting

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37


OFF, –30 to +12dB



6-24

RV-8

DTS-ES DECODING

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designed for, at a minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources.

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differ depending on the encoding present in the input source, the

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.

• DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to

ON or AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

Mode Adjust

• DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

• DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encoded

DTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the

MODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menu when a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

Note:

The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will be explained in greater detail later in this manual.


ES DECODING: AUTO

ES DECODING: ON

ES DECODING: OFF

5.1-Channel DTS

DTS

DTS-ES

DTS

Input Source

5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

DTS-ES

DTS-ES

DTS

6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

DTS-ES

DTS-ES

DTS

6-25

Mode Adjust

DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILM

MODE ADJUST FILM OR FILM

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources with enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are present, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discreteencoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

-10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO

Refer to page 6-37

AUTO, ON, OFF

Refer to page 6-37



Lexicon

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSIC


OR

MUSIC

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes, similar to the DTS-ES

L7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven c h a n n e l s f r o m 5 . 1 a n d 6 . 1 - c h a n n e l m u s i c s o u rc e s w i t h e n h a n c e d f r o n t s t e e r i n g t o p r o v i d e remarkable sound improvement compared to other decoders.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of

5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES music sources. The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setups.


VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

ON

OFF

7kHz

15ms

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB


ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

+0.0dB

AUTO

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF



6-26

RV-8

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2Cin

MODE ADJUST OR

UL2Cin

The DTS THX UL2Cin (ULTRA2 CINEMA) and DTS-ES THX listening modes allow 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel DTS sources that lack DTS-ES encoding. They are designed for playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel DTS-ES discrete-encoded film sources. DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

These modes apply:

• THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

• THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated.

To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding:

1. Press MODE ADJUST DECODING.

2. Use the or arrow to select either AUTO (the default) or OFF.

When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF, the DTS-ES THX

UL2 Cin listening mode is always active. When the parameter is set to AUTO, the DTS-ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode activates when a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

Mode Adjust

When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated:



Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more

information.

The DTS-ES THX listening mode

The DTS-ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and rear speakers are present and DTS-ES decoding is active.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO (the default) or ON and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

The table on the next page shows the conditions for the behavior of the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX modes when activated:

Option/Parameter

RE-EQUALIZER

LFE MIX

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

ON

+0.0dB

AUTO

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF



6-27

Mode Adjust

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2CIN

(continued)

Lexicon


ES DECODING: AUTO

ES DECODING: ON

ES DECODING: OFF

5.1-Channel DTS

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS-ES THX

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS THX MUSIC


The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear

speakers. Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for

more information. This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speaker setups.

Input Source

5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

DTS-ES THX

DTS-ES THX

DTS THX UL2Cin

6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

DTS-ES THX

DTS-ES THX

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) Discr

MODE ADJUST

OR OR

Discr

This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources.

The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and

the speaker setup. Refer to page 6-25 for more information.

Option/Parameter Default Setting

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


–10.0 to +0.0dB



Note:

The DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode and can only be

activated with the front-panel or remote control Mode and

buttons.

6-28

Option/Parameter

LFE MIX

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

+0.0dB

AUTO

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF



RV-8

DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHAN

MODE ADJUST 2-CHAN

OR 2-CHAN

These modes, recommended for recording purposes, send downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.


CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

+0dB

+0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL +0dB

LFE MIX

ES DECODING

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

AUTO

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37


–25 to +5dB

–5 to +5dB

–127 to +127

–5 to +5dB

–20.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

OFF, –30 to +12dB



Mode Adjust

5.1a L7 FILM

MODE ADJUST 5.1 FILM

The 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels from 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.

This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio controls (tone controls).


VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

-10.0 to +0.0dB



.

6-29

Mode Adjust

5.1a L7 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST 5.1a MUSIC

The 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1a

LOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources.


VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

ON

OFF

7kHz

15ms

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB


ON, OFF


ON, OFF

ON, OFF

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

-10.0 to +0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37



.

Lexicon

5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX & 5.1a THX

MODE ADJUST 5.1a UL2Cin

OR

5.1a SurEX

OR

5.1a

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX, and 5.1a THX listening modes are designed to convert 5.1-channel analog film sources that lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio. The modes also allow 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio controls (tone controls). The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX, and 5.1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers. These modes apply:

• THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

• THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the speaker setup.

The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated.

6-30

RV-8

Mode Adjust


SURROUND EX: ON

SURROUND EX: OFF

5.1-Channel Analog

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active.

THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF. When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated:



Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more

information.

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active.

THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON.

When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from 5.1-channel analog sources.

Input Source


Analog (Flagged)

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2


Analog (Non-Flagged)

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2

The 5.1a THX listening mode

The 5.1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2 nor THX Surround EX decoding is active.

Parameter

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

ON

OFF


+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

-10.0 to +0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

ON, OFF

ON, OFF



.

6-31

Mode Adjust

5.1a THX MUSIC

MODE ADJUST 5.1a MUSIC

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources. It cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are present. This mode performs best in home theaters where the rear speaker are placed close together.

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer

to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more informa-

tion.


LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


-10.0 to +0.0dB



.

Note:

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front-

panel or remote control Mode buttons.

Lexicon

5.1a STANDARD

MODE ADJUST 5.1a STANDARD

This mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used, the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals

(with appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37



.

6-32

RV-8

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST 5.1a 2-CHANNEL

This mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into

2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to the front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for recording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or multi-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel recording format.


CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

+0dB

+0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL +0dB

LFE MIX

SUB L/R LVL

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37

-25 to +5dB

-5 to +5dB

-127 to +127

-5 to +5dB

-20.0 to +0.0dB

OFF, -30 to +12dB



.

Mode Adjust

5.1a BYPASS

MODE ADJUST 5.1a BYPASS

• Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as

DVD-A or SACD players.

• Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, as shown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internal processing.

• When both side and rear speakers are present, surround channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.

To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT

LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to deactivate the associated surround speakers.

• Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then

2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Default Setting

Refer to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37


Note:

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controls are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.

6-33

Mode Adjust

2CH BYPASS

MODE ADJUST 2CH BYPASS

This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no internal processing.

The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.

Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then

2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and OFF.

Note:

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) are not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.

Lexicon

HEADPHONE L7

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.

This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related

Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones.

The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channel sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the

HEADPHONE listening mode are available.

HEADPHONE 5.1

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded music or film sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones.

The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Digital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.

6-34

RV-8

HEADPHONE DTS

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones.

The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTSencoded sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.

HEADPHONE 5.1a

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE 5.1a

HEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening through headphones.

The HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode is recommended for

5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.

No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode are available.

Mode Adjust

LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED & LIVE! LARGE

MODE ADJUST

LIVE! SMALL

OR

LIVE! MED

OR

LIVE! LARGE

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. It provides a realistic illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space. LIVE!

SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small, but larger than an average living room. LIVE! MED simulates the reverberations of a small hall. LIVE! LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall.

LIVE! requires two permanently mounted microphones. (See “LIVE!

CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for placement and calibration instruc-

tions.) LIVE! cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CDs or

DVDs.

LIVE! SMALL parameter settings:

Parameter

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

Default Setting

597ms

597ms

3.1kHz

3.1kHz

10ms

Refer to page 6-37


115ms to 15.4s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE


+0dB

–13dB

156Hz

0

0%

19m

–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB


0 to 4

0% to 100%

4m to 60m

6-35

Mode Adjust

LIVE! MED parameter settings:

Parameter

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM


1.84s

2.76s

2.4kHz

3.1kHz

18ms

115ms to 15.4s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! MED ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

Default Setting

–4dB

–14dB

156Hz

2

25%

30m


–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB


0 to 4

0% to 100%

4m to 60m

Lexicon

LIVE! LARGE parameter settings:

Parameter

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM


4.71s

4.71s

3.1kHz

2.4kHz

20ms

115ms to 30.8s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

Default Setting

–6dB

–17dB

156Hz

2

28%

38m


–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB


0 to 4

0% to 100%

4m to 60m



6-36

RV-8

OUTPUT LEVELS

MODE ADJUST Listening Mode OUTPUT LEVELS

OUTPUT LEVELS

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

SUB +0dB

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output levels for the Main

Zone audio output connectors labeled

Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter appears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes a

SUB LVL parameter.

Parameter

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUB

Default Setting

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB


OFF, –30 to +12dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB



.

CUSTOM

MODE ADJUST (Listening Mode) CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.

Mode Adjust

CUSTOM VS PRESET

MODE ADJUST (Listening Mode) CUSTOM CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listening mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.

When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.

The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to their factory-default settings.

Note:

The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode menu parameter settings.

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

PRESET

CUSTOM

To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode:

1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS-

TOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.

2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is open, press the remote control

and arrow buttons to toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode.

3. When finished, press the

arrow button to close the CUSTOM

VS PRESET drop-down menu.

6-37

Mode Adjust

RESET MODE

MODE ADJUST (Listening Mode)

CUSTOM RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode, restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default settings.

To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:

1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE option. The PRESS RIGHT

V TO RESTORE MODE message appears in the on-screen display.

CUSTOM


RESET MODE

PRESS RIGHT

V

TO RESTORE MODE

Lexicon

2. Press the arrow button to restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode. Press the arrow button to close the message without restoring the factory-default.

Note:

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.

6-38

RV-8

Mode Adjust

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.

When set to ON, the RV-8 provides an increased sense of spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when the primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best results, it is recommended that you position the surround speakers to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.

ACADEMY FILTER

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than more recent mono film sources.

ON, OFF

Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-8 continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF for music sources.

BASS CONTENT

BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO

Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.

When set to BINAURL, the RV-8 activates low-frequency compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources recorded with stereo bass.

BASS ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, depending on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front, side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of

40Hz or lower.

BASS RT

5ms to 48.6s

Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dB in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

BASS XOVER

Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.


CALIBRATION

Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to

“PANORAMA” on page 6-13 for more information.

6-39

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

(continued)

CENTER

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.

Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!

modes.

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel, changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

CENTER MIX

–25 to +5dB

Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this parameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

–127 to +127

Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set this parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

COMPRESSION

AUTO, ON, OFF

Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When

ON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF, compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for

Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels, especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in all Dolby Digital modes.

CTR WIDTH

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in all modes.

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.

Available in all modes.

DIMENSION


Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be useful with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced toward the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to

REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

6-40

RV-8

EARLY RFLX LVL

–80dB to +12dB, OFF

Controls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in all

LIVE! modes.

EFFECT LVL

–12 to +6dB

Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.

ES DECODING

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from

5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON is selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When

OFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins on page 5-25 for more information.

Note the following:

• DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present.

• The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the

ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to

AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel

Mode Adjust

discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.

This parameter is available in all DTS modes.

EX DECODING

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disengaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non- flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input signal.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby

Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby

DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 for more information.


• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present.

6-41

Mode Adjust

Lexicon


(continued)

• This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,

DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.

• When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or

Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the

EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON and

OFF settings.

Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1

MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.

FRONT STEERING


Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.

When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,

L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.

INPUT BALANCE

L< to <|> to >R

Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.

LISTENER POS

–127 to +127

Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the

–127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.

Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for more information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.

Note:

The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the front left and right speakers.

LIVENESS

30ms to 20.2s

Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic more reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available in

NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.

LFE MIX

–20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeled

Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output signal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels.

LOW FREQ WIDTH

–25 to +25dB

Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.

Available in PANORAMA mode.

6-42

RV-8

MASTER LEVEL

–5 to +5dB

Adjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

MID RT

24ms to 24.3s

Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time required for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB in level. The full parameter range might not be available depending on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

OUTPUT LEVELS

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,

Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for more information. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

PANORAMA

ON, OFF

When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.

Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

Mode Adjust

Note:

The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx

MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate

PANORAMA listening mode (page 6-13).

PRE-DELAY

1 to 100ms, OFF

Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.

Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, you should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.

When set to ON, the RV-8 applies a high-frequency filter. When set to OFF, the RV-8 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1

L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,

DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.

REAR DLY OFFSET

OFF, 1 to 30ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that you increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA mode.

6-43

Mode Adjust

Lexicon


(continued)

REAR L/R

–30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode, restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factorydefault settings. Available in all modes.

SIDE L/R

–30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the Main

Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,

5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.

SIZE

4 to 20 or 30m

Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or

30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,

CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

REVERB LVL

–80 to +0dB, OFF

Controls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.

ROLLOFF


Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It is recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate highfrequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

SHAPE

0 TO 4

Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either is set to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

SOUND STAGE


Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening space. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.

Available in all Logic 7 modes.

6-44

RV-8

SOURCE

RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that

begins on page 6-13 for more information about the SOURCE

parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

Note:

The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound, although both the front left and right speakers generate the external calibration source signal.

SPEAKER ANGLE

10 to 90deg

Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening

position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6-13

for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.

Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to

ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source, the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

Mode Adjust

SPREAD

SUB & SUB LVL

0 to 100%

Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly create the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; if either is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears on listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accommodate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!

modes.

SURR ROLLOFF


Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio output connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to output signals generated by the RV-8. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

SURROUND DLY

0 to 15ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recommended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space.

SURROUND EX

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When

ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX

Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.

6-45

Mode Adjust

Lexicon


(continued)

When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

(continued)

not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX

Surround EX encoding.

THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX ULTRA2 listening modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged. Refer to the 5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX SurEX and 5.1 THX

listening mode descriptions that begin on page 6-18, or the DTS

THX ULTRA2 and DTS-ES THX listening mode descriptions that

begin on page 6-27 for more information.

SURROUND MIX

-5 to +5dB

Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

TREB CUT RT

500Hz to 20kHz

Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in the reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to grow progressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because it simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting this parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates, and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available in all LIVE! modes.

VOCAL ENHANCE

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

Controls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connector labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility, particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.


• Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low level clicks in the front speakers.

• THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present.

6-46

RV-8

MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS

Mode Adjust

The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ACADEMY FILTER

AUTO AZIMUTH

BASS CONTENT

All L7 modes

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

L7 FILM and L7 TV

PANORAMA

BASS ENHANCE

BASS RT

All L7 modes

CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

CALIBRATION PANORAMA

CENTER

CENTER DEPTH

All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and

LIVE! modes)

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

CENTER MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

COMPRESSION

CTR WIDTH

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN


All Dolby Digital modes

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

CUSTOM VS PRESET

DIMENSION

EARLY RFLX LVL

EFFECT LVL

ES DECODING

All modes

Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

All LIVE! modes

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

All DTS modes

6-47

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MODE-PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS

(continued)


EX DECODING

FRONT STEERING

INPUT BALANCE

LFE MIX

LISTENER POS

LIVENESS

LOW FREQ WIDTH

MASTER LEVEL

MID RT

OUTPUT LEVELS

PANORAMA

PRE-DELAY

RE-EQUALIZER

REAR DLY OFFSET

REAR L/R

RESET MODE

REVERB LVL

ROLLOFF

SHAPE

SIDE L/R


5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL

L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes

PANORAMA

All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes and 5.1a BYPASS

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL

PANORAMA


CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes


NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS

(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THX

All L7 modes and PANORAMA


All modes

All LIVE! modes


All LIVE! modes


6-48

RV-8


SIZE

SOUND STAGE

SPEAKER ANGLE

SPEECH DETECT

SPREAD

SUB & SUB LVL

SURR ROLLOFF

SURROUND DLY

SURROUND EX

SURROUND MIX

TREB CUT RT

VOCAL ENHANCE



All L7 modes

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL

All LIVE! modes

All except LIVE! modes

All L7 modes


THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX

5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

All LIVE! modes

All L7 modes

Mode Adjust

6-49

7

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance ..................................................................7-4

Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

TROUBLESHOOTING

The RV-8 does not power on.

1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”) position.

2. Attempt to power on the RV-8 with the front-panel Standby button and remote control On button.

3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between the rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.

4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.

The remote control does not work.

1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the front-panel IR receiver. When the RV-8 is not using the rearpanel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line of sight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. The remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.

2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted

with the proper polarity (page 1-6).

3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no audio.

1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be increased with the front-panel volume knob or the remote control VOL and buttons.

2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE

ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen and

7-2

Lexicon

front-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate mute, press the Mute button or adjust the volume level.

3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned to the selected input.

4. Make sure the RV-8 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,

follow the instructions that begin on page 2-29 to open the

STATUS menu for the current input source.

Dialogue sounds muffled.

If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then, make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to

NONE (page 3-31).

A humming sound is present in the audio.

1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the cable provider for assistance.

2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.

Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated component is properly grounded and connected to the same electrical circuit as the RV-8.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no video.

1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables – to ensure a good connection to the associated component.

RV-8

2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN

(page 3-11) parameters to ensure the appropriate video

connector is assigned to the selected input.

RF interference is present in the audio or video.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.

2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.

The RV-8 is exhibiting erratic behavior.

1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait

10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |

(“on”) position.

2. Use the RV-8 configuration tool to download the current RV-8 configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all userdefined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page to restore factory-default settings.

If all else fails...

1. Document all user-defined settings on the Installation

Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instruc-

tions on page 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.


2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.

3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or www.lexicon.com.

Note:

Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase for answers to frequently asked questions and additional troubleshooting information.

The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute it resumed. This seems to happen occasionally.

Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY option active? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. When the broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTO

FREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If the station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal, then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the volume mute. Otherwise, auto frequency scans for another alternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot of alternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeable amount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Auto frequency option.

7-3


ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should be performed on a periodic basis.

• Clean the RV-8 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strong commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool or metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, a

Lexicon

low-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its exterior surface.

• Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote control requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries are low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS

When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and userdefined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Before restoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings in the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.

FACTORY SETTINGS

EXIT

RESTORE DEFAULTS


HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

To restore factory-default settings:

1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to their factory-default settings.

2. If the RV-8 is powered on, press the front-panel standby button or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and deactivate the RV-8. If the RV-8 is in standby mode, proceed to step 3.

7-4

3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control On button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-8.

4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mute button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the onscreen and front-panel displays.

5. Press the remote control

and arrow buttons to highlight the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factorydefault settings.

6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remote control

arrow button to select this option.

• If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the

FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. When this message appears, press a front-panel or remote control button to restart the RV-8.

• If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu will close and the two-line status will open in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

A

Appendix

Specifications ............................................................................ A-2

Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... A-4

Appendix A

SPECIFICATIONS

Audio Input & Output Connectors

Analog Audio Inputs Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2 stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors

Digital Audio Inputs • Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical connectors

• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-

958, S/PDIF standards

• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates

• Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS, DTS-

ES discrete and DTS-96K data formats

Main Zone Audio

Outputs

Eight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,

Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R

Zone 2 Audio Outputs • One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo connector

• One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector

• One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical connector

Zone 3 Audio Outputs One stereo (RCA, variable output level) connector

Headphone One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connector

Amplifier Seven channels, two channels can be assigned to Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Main Zone Audio Performance

A/D Conversion

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

*Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz,

–0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz

*THD + Noise

*Dynamic Range

Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven

• 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

*Signal-to-Noise Ratio • 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

A-2

Lexicon

Main Zone Audio Performance

Input Sensitivity 200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB input gain

100kΩ in parallel with 150pF Input Impedance

Preamp Output Level • 150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)

• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at +12dB

Preamp Output

Impedance

500

Ω

in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)

Zone 2 and Zone 3 Audio Performance

A/D Conversion

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture (Zone 2 only)

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

Frequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz

THD + Noise

Dynamic Range

Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)

101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Input Sensitivity 200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level)

Input Impedance 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Preamp Output Level • 200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum

• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at 0dB

Preamp Output

Impedance

300

Ω

in parallel with 150pF

Video Input & Output Connectors

Video Inputs

Video Outputs

Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component video (RCA)

Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two

S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component

(RCA)

RV-8

Composite & S-Video Performance

Compatibility

Switching

Output Level

Impedance

NTSC, PAL and SECAM

Active

1.0V peak-to-peak

Input Return Loss

Differential Gain

Differential Phase

Bandwidth

K Factor

75Ω

>40dB

<0.5%

<0.5°

>25MHz

<0.3%

Gain ±0.15dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >65dB

Frequency Response 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dB

Component Video Performance

Compatibility

Switching

Impedance

Insertion Loss

Bandwidth

Video Converter

3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent

Passive

75Ω

<3dB

>150MHz

NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/Pr

Microphone Input Connectors

Inputs

Input Sensitivity

Input Impedance

Two microphone jacks

10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)

20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)

FM Tuner Performance

Tuning Range

Usable Sensitivity

64MHz to 108MHz

<4uV, 1.6mV typical

Appendix A

FM Tuner Performance

Selectivity >87dBmV, 93dBmV typical

Frequency Response 50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dB

THD + Noise <0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV

Image Rejection

AM Suppression

>50dB, >60dB typical

>45dB, >55dB typical

AM Tuner Performance

Tuning Range

Usable Sensitivity

THD + Noise

Wideband AGC

520 to 1720kHz

<8uV, 4uV typical

< 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)

>80dBmV

Phono Performance (MM)

Frequency Response 50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10Hz

THD + Noise < 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV input

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimum

Compatible Amplifier Connectors

Banana Plugs

Spade Connectors

Bare Wire

Standard 0.75 inch plugs

Size 10-12 gauge

Up to 10 gauge bare wire

Other

Trigger Outputs

RS-232 Serial Input/

Output

One power on/off and one programmable connector on detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)

Two 9-pin D-sub connectors

A-3

Appendix A

Other

Power Requirements 120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detachable power cord

RV-8

Dimensions &

Weight

• Height (with feet): 7.76 inches (197.1mm)

• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)

• Depth: 21.2 inches (538.48mm)

• Weight: 65 lb. (29.48kg)

Rack-Mounting • Optional brackets are available for installation in a standard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)

Environment

Remote Control

• Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)

• Storage temperature: –30° to 75°C (–22° to 167°F)

• Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensation

• Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit, preprogrammed and learning

• Requires four AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recommended)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Application of Council Directive(s):

89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC

Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:

EN 55013:2001

EN 55020:2002

EN 61000-3-2-2000

EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001

EN 61000-3-11:2000

EN 60065:1998

Manufacturer:

Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.

Type of Equipment: Digital Controller

Model:

Lexicon RV-8

Date:

August 2005

Harman Specialty Group

Vice President of Engineering

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Tel: 781-280-0300

Fax: 781-280-0490

Lexicon

A-4

B

Appendix

Menu Tree ..................................................................................B-2

Appendix B

MENU TREE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

continued on page B-6

SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS




BROWNOUT PROTECT ON

CAUTION!

IF SET TO OFF

THIS ACTION WILL

DISABLE INTERNAL

BROWNOUT PROTECTION

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS


DISPLAY SETUP



A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME


OFF

OFF



MAIN POWER ON -30dB

MUTE LEVEL -30dB

Z2 PWR ON

Z3 PWR ON

-30dB

-30dB

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

-30dB

+12dB

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

B-2

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON


LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

LOCKED

UNLOCKED


!CAUTION!


YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS

ss

TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN


Lexicon

TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

PLIIx MUS OFF

PLII+ OFF

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

OFF

OFF

PL +

PRO LOGIC

OFF

OFF

+ OFF

CIN OFF

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

OFF

OFF


2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF


MONO OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

5.1

FILM

5.1

TV

5.1

MUSIC

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

OFF

OFF



5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

OFF

OFF

FILM

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

MUSIC

2-CHAN

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF



5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

OFF

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a

OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

RV-8

SETUP MENU: INPUTS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS




NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

DVD2

COAX-2

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-2

2

FILM

D 5.1 FILM

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

Appendix B

Selecting SETUP INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input (for example,

DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below.

The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default parameter settings for each input.

SAT INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

SAT

OPTICAL-1

ANALOG IN ANALOG-1

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-3

3

TV

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ANLG

VCR INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

VCR

NONE

ANALOG-2

AUTO

S-VIDEO-4

3

FILM

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ANLG

TV INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

TV

OPTICAL-2

ANALOG-3

AUTO

S-VIDEO-5

3

TV

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ANLG

CD INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

CD

COAX-3

NONE

AUTO

NON

NONE

MUSIC

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

MUSIC

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL

TUNER INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

TUNER

NONE

TUNER

AUTO

NONE

NONE

MUSIC

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

MUSIC

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ANLG

PHONO INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

PHONO

NONE

PHONO

AUTO

NONE

NONE

MUSIC

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

MUSIC

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ANLG

B-3

Appendix B

SETUP MENU: INPUTS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



DVD1 INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME


PRESS MENU TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

ANALOG-8

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

The appearance of the ANALOG

IN menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input

connectors. Refer to page 3-8 for

more information.


AUTO

MANUAL

ON

+0.dB

+0.0dB

AUTO GAIN

dB L R

0

-6

-15

-30

-45

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

DIGITAL

ANLG

DMIX

DVD1 VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

NONE

DVD1 COMPONENT

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

NONE

ON

OFF

-18 to +12dB

Indicates the current amount of analog audio input level adjustment for the selected analog audio input connector. This parameter cannot be adjusted.


NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

1

FILM

D

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

FILM

5.1a

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 2-CH MODE

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

PRO LOGIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

B-4

Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the corresponding menu shown below. These menus are identical regardless of which input is selected.

DVD1 D MODE

5.1

5.1

5.1

FILM

TV

MUSIC

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

HEADPHONE 5.1

USE LAST

FILM

MUSIC

2-CHAN

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

DVD1 5.1a MODE

5.1a

5.1a

FILM

MUSIC

5.1a

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

HEADPHONE 5.1a

USE LAST

DVD1 MIC MODE

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

Lexicon

AUTO

OFF

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

DVD1 MAIN ADV

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

DIGITAL

OFF

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

AUTO

ON

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

ON

A

FORMAT DETECT NORMAL

NORMAL

FAST

ON

OFF

A

B

DVD1 ZONE2 ADV

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

+0dB

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

BLOCKED

ENABLED

-18 to +12dB

44.1kHz

48kHz

88.2kHz

96kHz

ON

OFF

RV-8

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

80 Hz

80 Hz

80 Hz

80 Hz

80 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

Appendix B

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

60 Hz

80Hz

80Hz

C

80Hz

OFF

80Hz

N/A

APART

80Hz

M

SUB

80Hz

L SL RL

80Hz 80Hz

ON

OFF

APART

CLOSE

TOGETHER


!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL



SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz

ULTRA2 SUB OFF

BGC

ASA

N/A

APART

THX REAR SPEAKERS

THX 80Hz

NONE

ON

OFF

APART

CLOSE

TOGETHER

F R O N T L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

CENTER SPEAKERS

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

S I D E L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

R E A R L / R S P E A K E R S

FULL

FULL + SUB

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE


FULL

3 0 Hz

4 0 Hz

5 0 Hz

6 0 Hz

7 0 Hz

80Hz

THX 8 0 Hz

90Hz

1 0 0 Hz

1 1 0 Hz

1 2 0 Hz

NONE

B-5

Appendix B


(continued)

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS




DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS or

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK

MICROPHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no

ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO-

PHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opens the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.


GROUP MICROPHONES

INTO A BUNDLE IN THE

MIDDLE OF THE ROOM

PRESS TO

BEGIN MIC CHECK


MIC 1

MIC 2

ERROR

OK

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

PRESS TO CONTINUE

(MICROPHONE)

OK



PLEASE WAIT

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

or

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

or

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

or

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE



PLEASE WAIT

When an ERROR message appears on the last

CHECK MICROPHONES screen, press the or arrow button to highlight the desired microphone.

Then, press the arrow button to view more details about the error.

One of the messages shown to the left will appear in the on-screen display.

B-6

RV-8

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens shown on the right indicate the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker.

Press the arrow button to return to the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).

Then, press the arrow button to select the other calibration procedure or press the arrow button to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


MIC CHECK REQUIRED




DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS



LISTENING POSITIONS

DISTANCES

LEVELS


PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

OK

OK

LEVELS

OK

DISTANCES

OK

or

DISTANCES

LEVELS

ERROR

ERROR


PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

(SPEAKER)

OK

ERROR

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

(SPEAKER)


(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

Appendix B

60 Hz

N/A

COUNTDOWN



10

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in the on-screen display, indicating the results for each calibration procedure. If there is an error, press the or

arrow button to highlight the desired calibration procedure. Then, press the arrow button to select this procedure. Selecting

DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below. Selecting the LEVELS option opens the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

ERROR

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

(SPEAKER)

OK

(SPEAKER)


(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

B-7

Appendix B


(continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

Lexicon

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS


MIC CHECK REQUIRED




DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS



LISTENING POSITIONS

60 Hz

N/A

COUNTDOWN



10

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the

and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker.

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the

and arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected speaker.

B-8

SET DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

0.0ft

R SR RR

0.0ft

0.0ft

C

0.0ft

0.0ft

M

SUB

0.0ft

L SL RL

0.0ft

0.0ft

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

APPLIED

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUB (MONO)

ERROR

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

AUTO DISTANCES

APPLIED

(SPEAKER)


(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

SET LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

R SR RR

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

C

0.0dB

M

SUB

0.0dB

L SL RL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

ORIGINAL LEVELS

APPLIED

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

AUTO LEVELS

APPLIED

ERROR

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

(SPEAKER)


(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

RV-8

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft

FEET

METERS

FEET

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS


AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS





40Hz

R SR RR

60Hz 60Hz

60Hz

C

40Hz

M

SUB

40Hz

L SL RL

60Hz 60Hz

INTERNAL NOISE

!CAUTION!






SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

-18 to 12dB

Appendix B


CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

ON

ON

100dB

!CAUTION!


75 to 120dB

ON

OFF

B-9

Appendix B

SETUP MENU: I/O CONFIG

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

REAR PANEL CONFIG

8 STEREO INPUTS

OR

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

OR

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

8 STEREO INPUTS

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

SETUP MENU: DISPLAYS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON

OFF

B-10

DISPLAY SETUP



A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME


OFF

OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE


STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

2 SECONDS

TOP

NTSC

ON

ON

OFF


STATUS

BRIGHTNESS

ALWAYS ON

100%

100%

75%

50%

25%

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

Lexicon

RV-8

SETUP MENU: TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS



USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

HIGH

MED

LOW

SETUP MENU: LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS




!CAUTION!


YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

COUNTDOWN

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

USA

LOW

TUNER PRESETS


RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

FAST

MEDIUM

SLOW

PRESET NAME

RDS NAME

FREQUENCY



10

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

PRESS RIGHT

J

TO START AUTOLOAD

PRESS RIGHT

J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

ON

OFF


IN PROGRESS

PLEASE WAIT

Appendix B


CALIBRATION DONE

OR


SIGNAL TOO LOW

B-11

Appendix B

MAIN MENU: TUNER PRESETS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

TUNER PRESETS

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

09

10

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

0.00FM

Each tuner preset page allows up to 10 preset stations.

EDIT PRESET 1

FREQUENCY

BAND

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

0.00

FM

EDIT STATION NAME

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

STATION

LOADED

PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

MAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

L< BALANCE >B

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

OFF









B< FADER >F

ON

OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

-6.0 to +6.0dB

Lexicon

B-12

RV-8

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

* These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker setup and parameter settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

Descriptions for more information.

MODE ADJUST

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

PLIIx + *

PLIIx MOV*

OFF

OFF

PLIIx MUS* OFF

PLII+ OFF

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

OFF

OFF

PL +

PRO LOGIC

OFF

OFF

+ OFF

CIN

MUSIC

OFF

OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF


CHURCH OFF

CATHEDRAL OFF

PANORAMA OFF


2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF


MONO

5.1

FILM

5.1

TV

5.1

MUSIC

*

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV*

5.1 PLIIx MUS*

DIGITAL EX*

5.1 2-CHANNEL

OFF

OFF


5.1 MONO SURR OFF

5.1 MONO

FILM*

OFF

OFF

MUSIC* OFF

* OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

*

MUSIC*

2-CHAN*

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

5.1a OFF



MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

OFF

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1

OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a

OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

FILM

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

TV

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

+0.0dB

FILM

OFF

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING

SOUND STAGE

MUSIC

NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

MUSIC SURR

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MSURR

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

15ms

Appendix B

PLIIx +

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PLIIx MOV

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

PLIIx MUS

PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

DIMENSION

OFF

3

SURROUND DLY

OUTPUT LEVELS

NEUTRAL

10ms

CUSTOM

PLII +

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

PLII MOVIE

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PLII MUSIC

PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

DIMENSION

SURROUND DLY

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

3

NEUTRAL

10ms

PL +

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CIN

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

CATHEDRAL

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

MID RT

BASS RT

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

12

ON

30m

3.72s

4.47s

23ms

3.1kHz

-8dB

MUSIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

NIGHTCLUB

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

11

ON

5m

196ms

5ms

9.0kHz

+3dB

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL +4dB

BASS CONTENT STEREO

LOW FREQ WIDTH

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

+0

3.1kHz

15ms

<l> INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

2-CH SURROUND

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CONCERT HALL

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

12

ON

20m

1.72ms

OFF

2.4kHz

-2dB

CHURCH

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

MID RT

BASS RT

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5

ON

20m

1.56s

1.87s

24ms

2.4kHz

-3dB

2-CHANNEL

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

MONO

SUB LVL

CUSTOM

+0dB

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

-9dB

ON

3.1kHz

MONO SURROUND

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0dB

B-13

Appendix B


(continued)

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

+0.0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

FILM

OFF

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

+0.0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

+0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

MUSIC

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

+0.0dB

5.1 PLIIx MOV

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

5.1 PLIIx MUS

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

DIGITAL EX

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

5.1 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX +0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL

COMPRESSION

+0dB

OFF

LFE MIX

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

+0dB

5.1 MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL -9dB

ACADEMY FI8LTER +ON

SURR ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO SURR

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

LFE MIX

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0dB

FILM

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

AUTO

MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

AUTO

RE-EQUALIZER

LFE MIX

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

+0.0dB

AUTO

MUSIC

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

AUTO

B-14

2-CHAN

CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

DECODING

SUB L/R LVL

CUSTOM

+0dB

+0dB

+0

+0dB

+0.0dB

AUTO

+0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

ON

REAR

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

ON

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

5.1a

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1a

MUSIC

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1a STANDARD

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON

OFF

+0.0dB

+0.0dB

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX +0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

+0dB

+0.0dB

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

5.1a BYPASS

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

2CH BYPASS

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES 5.1

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES 5.1a

NO PARAMETERS

LIVE! SMALL

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

597ms

597ms

3.1kHz

3.1kHz

10ms

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED

REVERB LVL +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL -13dB

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

156Hz

0

SPREAD

SIZE

0%

19m

Lexicon

LIVE! MED

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

1.84s

2.76s

2.4kHz

3.1kHz

18ms

LIVE! MED ADVANCED

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

-4dB

-14dB

156Hz

2

25%

30m

LIVE! LARGE

MID RT

BASS RT

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

4.71s

4.71s

3.1kHz

2.4kHz

20ms

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

-6dB

-17dB

156Hz

2

28%

38m

RV-8

Appendix B

Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop

down menus are shown below and on the next page.

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL

BASS CONTENT

LOW FREQ WIDTH

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+4dB

STEREO

+0

3.1kHz

15ms



PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT

SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg

LISTENER POS +0

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

-9dB

ON

3.1kHz

3.1kHz

OUTPUT LEVELS

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUB

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

-9dB

ON

+0

3.1kHz

CUSTOM


RESET MODE

Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop

down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop

down menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON

OFF

BASS CONTENT

BINAURL

MONO

STEREO

CENTER

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

-127 to +127


PRESET

CUSTOM

DECODING

AUTO

ON

OFF

ACADEMY FILTER

ON

OFF

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON

OFF

BASS ENHANCE

ON

OFF

BASS RT

5ms to 48.6s

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

CENTER MIX

-25 to +5dB

COMPRESSION

AUTO

ON

OFF

CTR WIDTH

MIN,1 to 6, MAX

DIMENSION

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

EFFECT LVL

-12 to +6dB

EX DECODING

AUTO

ON

OFF

FRONT STEERING

OFF

MSURR

MUSIC

FILM

B-15

Appendix B


(continued)

Lexicon

INPUT BALANCE

L< <l> >R

LFE MIX

-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

CENTER MIX

-127 +0 +127

LIVENESS

30ms to 20.2s

MASTER LEVEL

MID RT

-5 to +5dB

24ms to 48.6s

REAR DLY OFFSET

OFF, 1 to 30ms

REAR L/R

OFF, -30 to 12dB

PANORAMA

ON

OFF

PRE-DELAY

10 to 100ms

RESET MODE

PRESS RIGHT

TO RESTORE MODE

ROLLOFF


SIZE

4 to 20 or 30ms

SOUND STAGE

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

SOURCE

RIGHT

LEFT & RIGHT

LEFT

SPEAKER ANGLE

10 to 90deg

SPEECH DETECT

ON

OFF

SUB LEVEL

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SUB L/R LVL

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SURR ROLLOFF


SURROUND DLY

0 to 15ms

SURROUND EX

AUTO

ON

OFF

SURROUND MIX

+5 to +5dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

+6.0dB

+3.0dB

+0.0dB

LOW FREQ WIDTH

-25 to +25

RE-EQUALIZER

ON

OFF

SIDE L/R

OFF, -30 to 12dB

B-16

RV-8

MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS

Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.


EXIT

RESTORE DEFAULTS


HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

Appendix B

STATUS MENUS

STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

ENCODING

C R SL SR dB

0

-6

-15

-30

L

-45

PG1

LFE

STATUS

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

PG2

5.1a STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

ANLG

96kHz

Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-29 for more information.

2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

dB

0

-6

-15

-30

L

-45

R

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

EX ENCODED

dB

0

-6

-15

-30

L C R SL SR

-45

PG1

LFE

2CH BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

D STATUS PG2

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

DIGITAL STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

B-17

C

Appendix

Remote Control Programming .................................................. C-2

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes ......................................... C-18

Appendix C

REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING

The RV-8 remote control has been designed to provide a new standard in remote control technology offering a very powerful and flexible preprogrammed and learning product.

The RV-8 remote control can operate up to 10 home entertainment and home automation components by using the preprogrammed code library in the remote control, by teaching up to 530 commands into the RV-8 remote from your original remote controls, or a combination of both. The RV-8 remote has many additional operating features to add convenience and enjoyment to the operation of any home entertainment system. You can create your own button labels on the LCD screen; program 50 favorite channel buttons; operate the volume, channel and transport buttons from one device when you are in another device; and perform multiple tasks with the press of a single button.

The RV-8 remote control features extensive preprogrammed IR codes for practically all major audio and video equipment. It can set up and operate various components by simply entering a threedigit code number assigned to the brand of component. The code numbers for

the various brands of components are listed beginning on page C-18.

Refer to the programming instructions on page C-5 for additional

information.

Lexicon

DEVICE ACTIVATION

In addition to controlling the RV-8, the remote is designed to operate up to seven components including Satellite Boxes, TV, DVD (LD), VCR,

CD and Phono. Remote control buttons perform different commands depending on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 or another device is activated.

However, each of the device buttons and corresponding functions cab be changed to meet individual requirements.

The Phono function could be used to operate lighting controls; the second DVD (DVD2) could be changed to operate a second TV, etc.

Each device button on the main screen contains two subpages of commands and the name of any LCD button can be changed, using up to five alphabet characters, numbers and symbols to customize the

unit to fit your audio/video devices. Refer to ““Edit Text on Function/

Device Buttons” on page 13 for more information.

C-2

RV-8

MACRO OPERATIONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent out with the push of a single button. Any function available on an original remote control or in the preprogrammed database can be added to a macro to completely automate what would normally be done by pushing buttons one at a time. A macro can be configured to power on a TV or projector, RV-8, and RT-10 Disc Player, change to the appropriate inputs and outputs, dim lights and start a movie. It can be as simple or as comprehensive as desired. There are two types of buttons that can be used for macro operations: M1, M2, M3; POWER and SYSTEM OFF

Buttons, as well as the programmable device buttons.

The M1, M2 and M3 are called ”system-wide” buttons because they send out the same signal no matter what device is currently controlled.

The POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons can be made “system-wide” if they are programmed with macros.

Note:

Programming the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons with a macro overrides the preprogrammed or learned code on the button.

See page C-10 for further information. Each of these five buttons is designed to be able to send out a series of up to 20 commands that are programmed into the buttons. One common use is to turn on and turn off all A/V components with one button press. Device buttons can be programmed with any macro sequence desired.

Appendix C

The remote has 10 device buttons which can send out a series of up to

20 programmed commands when pressed for more than one second.

These buttons are commonly used in sending audio input codes when you press the button to go to a device. The audio receiver would make an automatic input switch according to the device button pressed.

However, these buttons can be programmed with any desired macro.

Up to 50 favorite channel buttons can be programmed into the RV-8 remote. Each of these buttons can send out up to 10 commands. Refer

to “Programming Favorite Channels” on page 9 for more information.

Note:

The last Device selected will remain active when on the HOME page and will be shown at the bottom of the LCD screen. For example, if you are using

“TV” and then return to the HOME page, the hard buttons remain in TV mode. The LCD buttons only change when another device is selected.

The remote can be set up to operate audio component volume control buttons (UP, DOWN and MUTE) while all the other buttons control other equipment. The remote can also be set up to operate channel control and transport functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, FAST

FORWARD, SKIP-, SKIP+, PAUSE and RECORD buttons) from VCR,

DVD, LD, CD or any other mode while all other buttons in the remote

control are controlling other components. See page C-12 for more

information.

C-3

Appendix C

REMOTE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW

The first task is to get all original remote controls together. You may have one or more components that do not have original remote c o n t r o l s . T h e s e c a n s t i l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y t h e R V- 8 . T h e preprogrammed method must be used for those devices. For the rest, you can program the RV-8 to make it compatible with all components by following the preprogrammed method instructions, by using the original remote controls to teach the RV-8, or through both methods.

Next, it is recommended that you decide whether a “device-based,” or an “activity-based” configuration is desired.

A “device-based” configuration centers on each device with its two

LCD pages controlling one component. All of the functions that the original remote control has programmed in it would be put onto one device. The RV-8 remote comes with the labels and preprogrammed codes in a “device-based” setup.

When a preprogrammed code is chosen for a component from the

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes tables which start on page C-18, that code will be applied to one device only.

An “activity-based” configuration centers on what you are doing at the time. If you are watching a DVD on your TV, and are using the RV-8 to control the sound, you may want to start by setting up the DVD device using the preprogrammed method described in the next column, and then add functions from the other devices you will be using while watching your DVD video to the DVD device.

For example, while playing a DVD, to adjust the volume of the RV-8,

use the “Punch Through” method described on page C-12 to put the

RV-8’s volume control into the DVD device. To adjust other functions of

SETUP

P-PRO LEARN

FAV MACRO

PUNCH RECAL

ERASE EDIT

LIGHT CLONE

Lexicon

the RV-8 while staying in the DVD device, use the learning method described on page C-7 to add those functions to the DVD device, such as surround sound controls, the receiver's

DVD input code, the TV's power code, etc. In that instance, everything that is needed for watching a DVD on your TV without having to switch back and forth from device to device is available.

All programming is done by first entering the SETUP mode in the remote control. Press both the HOME and ENT (enter) buttons, simultaneously for three seconds to access the SETUP mode shown below. “SETUP” will be displayed at the top of the LCD screen. Specific programming instructions begin on the next page.

C-4

RV-8

USING PREPROGRAMMED CODES

To program the remote to make it compatible with other components:

1. Manually power on the device to be operated.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds until SETUP appears at the top of the LCD screen.

3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON” at the bottom of the LCD screen. Press the button for the device you wish to program. For example, to program a TV, press the TV button.

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE” at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Select the device from which to access the code table.

Appendix C

Note:

When using the Preprogramming method, always use the appropriate button as shown in the column when asked ”FROM TABLE.” The labels of the buttons may have been changed, but the codes are in the positons as shown to the left. For example, the AUDIO Code table will always be the top left button. The CD Code table will always be the fourth button down on the right side of the LCD screen, etc.

Use DVD2, not DVD1, to access the DVD code library. DVD1 has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10 Disc Player.

6. The remote will be flashing “ENTER NUMBER.” Refer to the tables

starting on page C-18 and find the manufacturer/brand of your

device. (If programming the remote for the TV device, find the

TV’s device code table, and so on.)

7. Point the remote control toward the device and enter the first three-digit code number selected for your device. There is no way of knowing which code is the one that will have the functions that more closely match your device than the others, so it is wise to try them all. See step 9 on the next page. (Enter the code number within 20 seconds of beginning the programming; otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more than one code number assigned to your brand, try one code number at a time until the right code number is found (the number that turns off the device). If the device turns off when the three-digit code is entered, make note of the code. It will have at least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the device.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button. The device should turn on. After it is confirmed that the right code is entered, save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. At this point try ALL of the buttons on the remote, and see which ones work with the device. The majority of the buttons should

C-5

Appendix C

work with the device. Make note of the code if it seems to be the right one, and try the next one. You are trying to find the one that has the most functions to operate your equipment. If there are any functions missing, you will learn them from your original remote in

the “Using Learning Method” section on page C-7.

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from Step 1 above.

11. Press EXIT at any time to stop the procedure.

12. When you are finished programming the remote, exit from the preprogramming mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Note:

A programmed code for each device can be changed at any time by using the preprogrammed method which starts on the previous page.

A new code will override an old code. For example, this would be done if a TV is replaced with a new TV. The code table for Laserdisc is stored under DVD2. The code table for cable box is stored under Zone 2. The code table for cassette player is stored under Zone 3.

Lexicon

AUTO SCAN WITH THREE-DIGIT NUMBER

You can also program the remote control by sending out a series of

Power Off commands for different brands stored in the library by using the following steps. This is similar to the first method, except it is easier to move through all of the device codes for your device and make note of each one that turns your device OFF.

To program the remote to make it compatible with other components:

1. Manually turn on the device you plan to operate.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds.


4.

The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON.” Press the device you wish to program. (For example, to program TV, press the TV button.)

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE.” Select the device from which the scanned code will be selected. (Important: If you have already relabeled your device keys, the LCD screen will not look

like the illustration on page C-5. Select the appropriate LCD

button for the “FROM TABLE” using the labels as shown in the illustration on page C-4. For example, if you have relabeled

PHONO as LIGHTS, you would still push the bottom right button to access the AUX Code Table.)

6. Point the remote control toward the component and press either the UP or DOWN button on the LCD. (It will send out a series of

Power Off codes when the button is kept pressed and the code numbers that are being sent are shown on the LCD.) If the right code number is sent, the component will turn off right after the code number is transmitted.

7. Release the UP or DOWN button as soon as the device is turned off. If you passed the one that turned off the device, manually turn the device back on, and reverse your UP or DOWN one press at a time, until the unit turns off. There is no way of knowing which

C-6

RV-8

code is the one that will have the functions that more closely match the device than the others, so it is advised to try them all.

See Step 9 below. (Press the UP or DOWN button within 20 seconds of beginning programming; otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more than one code number assigned to your brand, try one code number at a time until the correct code number is found (the number that turns off the device). If the device turns off when you enter the three-digit code, make note of the code. It will have at least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the device.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button.

After ensuring that the right code is entered, save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. Confirm that the right code number that matches the component was entered by pressing other functional buttons. If any of the buttons do not operate as they should, repeat from step 1.

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from step 1

(previous page).

11. Press EXIT at any time if you do not wish to proceed.

12. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

USING LEARNING METHOD

The RV-8 remote can be programmed to operate a device by

“teaching” the correct commands to the device buttons on the main screen menu; to the two sub-pages within each device button; to the

31 buttons and the joystick located in the middle of the remote control.

The RV-8 remote learns these commands by receiving infrared signals directly from your existing remote controls. The RV-8 remote receives these signals through its learning eye, located at the top of the unit.

Appendix C

Apart from the PAGE, HOME and FAV buttons, which cannot be taught, the RV-8 remote has the capability of learning up to 530 commands.

Note:

Function buttons are buttons that can be assigned a command to control a particular action for a device. Commonly used function buttons include the 2 pages of sub-commands within each of the 10 devices: channel up/ down, volume up/down, menu, guide, exit, info, digits 0-9 and the center of the joystick (thumbpad).

CAUTION!

Do not edit the Main, Zone 2 or Zone 3 buttons. Doing so will remove RV-8 control.

IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER

If the remote control fails to learn a function after a first attempt:

• Keep the remotes stable by placing them on a flat surface.

• Make sure the original remote is pointed at the learning eye at the top end of the case and is not at an angle.

• Make sure both remotes’ batteries aren't low.

• Avoid programming the RV-8 remote under bright lights, which can interfere with the infrared signals.

• Some buttons require a single, short push of the original remote's button; other “repeating” buttons, such as the VOL button, require that you “press and hold” the original remote’s button until “Good” flashes twice on the LCD screen.

• Try varying the distance between the remotes to find an optimal distance at which the codes are learned on the first or second try.

C-7

Appendix C

PROGRAMMING THE FUNCTION BUTTONS

To program the Function Buttons:


2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Select the DEVICE that contains the function button you wish to program.

4. Press the PAGE button to go to page 2 of the device if necessary.

5. Place the original remote control head to head with the RV-8 remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

6. Press the button on the RV-8 remote you wish to program. Only the three HOME, PAGE and FAV buttons cannot be programmed.

It is not recommended that you re-program the Main, Zone 2 or

Zone 3 buttons.

7. Press the button on the original remote control that you wish to program onto the RV-8 remote. Once the RV-8 remote has received the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash “GOOD” on the

LCD screen, indicating it learned the code correctly. (Perform Step

6 within 20 seconds of step 5; otherwise the remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If it flashes “Fail,” repeat from step 4 until it learns successfully.

8. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the buttons that are required.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit the

LEARNING mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

If you are having problems learning to the Volume, Channel and

Transport buttons, it may be because you have previously assigned a

“Punch Through” from another device to that device. To remove a

Punch Through, just “punch through” the device to itself. For

C-8

Lexicon

example, to erase a punch through from a TV to a SAT device, just

“punch” through the TV to the TV.

See “Programming “Punch Through” Functions” on page 12 for more

information.

PROGRAMMING THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS

This procedure will program ONE learned code onto the Device button, so that when that Device is selected, it will send out the learned signal as it changes to that Device's function pages.

To program the one learned code onto the Device button:


2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

4. Place the original remote control head-to-head with the RV-8 remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

5. Select any of the 10 device buttons to program onto the RV-8 remote. Press the button on the original remote control to program into the Device button chosen on the RV-8 remote. Once the RV-8 remote hasreceived the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash

“GOOD” on the LCD screen, indicating it learned the code correctly. If it flashes ”FAIL,” repeat from step 4 until it learns successfully. (Make sure to enter the code signal within 20 seconds of programming.)

6. Return to step 5 until all Device buttons have been programmed.

7. When done programming, press the HOME button to exit the

Learning mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

RV-8

Note:

Follow these instructions only if you actually want a code sent when changing devices. It may not be desired to send out codes when changing to a device. For example, you program the RV-8’s TV input code on the TV device, and are currently in the DVD device pages. The RV-8’s input is set to

DVD. Now you want to quickly adjust the picture on the TV. If the TV device button is pushed, it will change the input on the RV-8 to TV and you will not be able to adjust the picture for the DVD. In this case, it would be better to not program a code to the TV device.

PROGRAMMING FAVORITE CHANNELS

Up to 50Favorite Channel buttons can be programmed and saved.

Each favorite channel button can send up to 10 commands with one button press.

To program Favorite Channel Buttons:


2. Press the FAV button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the device button that corresponds to the component that the FAV channel will control. For example, pressing the TV device will only send the type of code to which that the TV responds to.

Pressing the SAT device will only control the satellite box.

4. Press the LCD button you will be assigning to the favorite channel and enter the channel number you wish to store in the FAV channel button. Up to 10 digits can be stored.

5. Press the favorite channel button selected in step 4 again to store the programmed channel.

Note:

If a wrong channel number is pushed, move the cursor by using the left or right button of the joystick and then reassign the correct channel number.

Appendix C

6. Repeat from Step 3 until all the desired FAV channel buttons have been programmed.

7. Once programming is completed, press the HOME button to exit from the Favorite Channel mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

There are five pages of LCD screens for favorite channel programming.

Scroll to other pages by pressing the PAGE or FAV button. In the

Favorite Channels macro, the following buttons can be used: 0-9,

ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and INFO/PAUSE.

Note:

To make even more powerful FAV macros, codes can be learned from original remote(s) to the 0-9, ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and

INFO/PAUSE buttons in any device, and used in your FAV macros. (This will not work if a preprogrammed device code has been applied to those buttons.) For example, some TVs require a code be sent after the digits other than the ENTER code in order to change channels. In this case, you could learn the proper code to the ENTER button from your original TV remote, and use that in your FAV macro.

C-9

Appendix C

PROGRAMMING MACRO BUTTONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent with the push of a single button. There are two types of macro functions that can be programmed: functions involving the M1, M2 and M3 buttons;or functions involving the POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons. Each of these buttons is designed to send up to 20 commands. The 10 device buttons can also send a macro of up to 20 commands when the device button is pressed for more than one second while on the HOME page of the remote control.

Note:

If the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons are programmed with a macro, they will no longer function as ON and OFF buttons for components. To restore their original on and off function, erase any macros programmed onto them.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO M1, M2, M3,

POWER AND SYSTEM OFF BUTTONS

To program macro functions to the M1, M2, M3, Power, System

Off buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT button simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the macro button (M1, M2, M3, Power or System Off) being programmed.

4. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro button you selected, in the order you want them stored. Up to 20 commands can be stored.

5. Be sure to end a macro on the Device page that you would like it to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

6. Store the commands programmed into the macro button by pressing the CH UP button.

C-10

Lexicon

7. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the Macros that you require.

8. When programming is complete, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will not work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro. The M1,

M2, M3, POWER and SYSTEM OFF macros are system-wide, which means they will function the same no matter what device is being used when they are programmed.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO THE TEN

DEVICE BUTTONS

To program Macro function to the 10 device buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENTER buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

4. Press one of the 10 device buttons.

5. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro button you selected in the order you want them stored. Up to 20 commands can be stored.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will not work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro.

6. Be sure to end your macro on the Device page that you would like to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

RV-8

7. Return to step 4 until all desired commands are programmed.

8. Save the commands selected to the macro button by pressing the

CH UP button.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit from this mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SET UP mode by pressing the HOME button once again. Tip: Remember that a single push of a Device Button that has a macro connected to it will take you to that device's function pages. Hold the Device

Button down for one second in order to send the macro that you have created for that Device Button.

Note:

Pressing the PAUSE button (bottom right of cursor pad) during the macro programming will add a time delay of 0.2 seconds between the commands. For example, pressing the PAUSE button three times will create a pause of 0.6 seconds between the commands where the delay was inserted. Pressing PAUSE does not count as a macro step.

When using a macro, remember to keep the remote pointed toward the components until the macro is finished being transmited. A

“Sending” icon will flash in the upper right corner of the LCD screen as the macro is sending each command. It will not appear when a series of PAUSE commands are being executed. Wait until the icon finishes flashing before using other functions or putting down the remote.

SAMPLE MACRO SEQUENCE

The following is a sample macro which demonstrates what a macro can accomplish. This example assumes the names of the devices have not been changed and that the “punch through” technique was used to assign the VOL to the RV-8. If the labels have been changed, insert the changed names into the example.

In this example, the M1 button will be used to power on the TV, the

RV-8 and the cable box; choose the appropriate inputs; and tune in a favorite TV channel.

Appendix C

1. Press HOME and ENT simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press MACRO.

3. Press M1.

4. Press MAIN. (Opens the remote control MAIN device page.)

5. Press POWER.

6. Press TV. (Opens the TV device page.)

7. Press POWER.

8. Press HOME.

9. Press SAT. (Opens the SAT device page.)

10. Press POWER.

11. Press HOME.

12. Press MAIN

13. Press PAUSE three times. Pressing the PAUSE button three timesallows for an extra .6 seconds of wait time (3 x .2 seconds per push = .6 seconds). This step is included in this example because most receivers and amps take time to “cycle up” and cannot receive any commands, such as input, until the device is ready.

This example enabled the other steps of the macro to run while the Audio device is “cycling up.”

14. Press SAT. (This selects the “SAT” input on the RV-8.)

15. Press HOME.

16. Press SAT. (Back to this device to enter the appropriate channel.)

17. Press 1, then 3, then 5. (Then press the ENT button if the cable device requires it.)

18. Press CH UP to save the macro.

19. Press HOME twice. Press M1 to test the macro. It should turn on the RV-8, then the TV, then the satellite box, then change the input to SAT on the RV-8, then change the channel to 135.

C-11

Appendix C

Note:

A macro can end on any page, including the HOME page. In the previous example, the macro was ended on the SAT page before saving it, as this was the desired endpoint.

PROGRAMMING “PUNCH THROUGH” FUNCTIONS

The RV-8 volume control can be used in a different mode using the volume “punch through” feature. You can also have channel “punch through” (Channel Up, Channel Down) as well as eight VCR (or DVD) transport buttons (Play, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, Skip-, Skip+,

Pause, Record) operate in another mode such as SAT, CD and RV-8

MAIN modes.

To program “punch through” functions:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

Note:

When using “Punch Through,” think of the first device selected as the device that now controls the functions, and think of the second device as the device you want to control those functions. You are taking the controls of the second device and “punching them through” to the first device.

3. Press the VOL button on the LCD for Volume Punch Through, the

PLAY button for Transport Punch Through and the CH button for

Channel Punch Through.

4. Select the device you wish to “punch through” to (first device example - television or satellite receiver).

5. Select the device you wish to “punch through” from (second device example - RV-8 MAIN).

C-12

Lexicon

You are punching through the controls of the second device to the device that is currently being controlled by any other buttons. For example, for VOL you are “punching through” the controls of the RV-8 MAIN VOL to the TV or SAT, enabling you to control the RV-8 MAIN VOL when in the TV or SAT screen.

6. Punch Through is saved when the second device is pressed.

7. Repeat from step 2 to program Punch Through for other devices.

8. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit fromthis mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

9. Repeat from step 5 to “punch through” any other devices or learned buttons.

10. Press the HOME button to exit to main Punch Through mode.

Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

ERASING MACRO FUNCTIONS

To erase M1, M2, M3, Power, System Off buttons:


2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the MACRO button.

4. To erase all of the macro buttons in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

5. To erase just one of the macros, press the KEY button at step 4 and then one of the M1, M2, M3, POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons to erase the macro functions from that button.

6. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

7. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

RV-8

ERASING FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

To erase favorite channel buttons:



3. Press the FAV button.

4. To erase all the favorite channel buttons in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

5. To erase one button, press the KEY button. Press the individual button you want to erase and continue with any other individual buttons you want to erase.

6. Repeat from Step 5 to erase any favorite channel buttons.

7. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

8. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

ERASE MACRO FUNCTIONS FROM DEVICE BUTTONS

To erase macro function from device buttons:



3. Press the MACRO button.

4. Press the KEY button.

5. Press one of the 10 DEVICE buttons from which you wish to erase the macro function. Once the device button has been pushed the macro has been erased. The LCD will flash “ERASED!”

6. Exit from Macro mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Appendix C

ERASING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS

To erase “punch through” functions:


2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the VOL button for Volume Punch Through, the PLA button for Transport Punch Through or the CH button for Channel Punch

Through.

4. Press the device button from which you wish to erase Punch

Through.

5. Press the same device button again.

6. Punch through is erased when the same device button is pressed the second time.

7. Repeat from step 2 to erase the Punch Through for other devices.

8. Exit from Punch Through mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

EDIT TEXT ON FUNCTION/DEVICE BUTTONS

To edit text on function or device buttons:

1. Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the DEVICE button to display the function buttons for that device.

4. Press the function button on which you wish to write or edit text.

You can also go to the second page of the device by press ing the

PAGE button.

C-13

Appendix C

5. To edit DEVICE button text, skip Steps 3 and 4 and press the PAGE button before selecting the Device button.

6. The character to be changed will blink. To change the character use the number pad buttons on the remote control. The characters assigned to each number pad button are shown below.

It will cycle to a different character each time the same number pad button is pressed.

Note:

Move the cursor left or right using the joystick. Delete a current character by using the cursor down on the joystick. Using the “cursor down” technique is a quick way to delete all of the text on a label.

1. A B C

5. M N O

9. Y Z (Blank)

2. D E F

6. P Q R

0. + - <>, etc

3. G H I

7. S T U

4. J K L

8. V W X

7. Save the text by pressing the button you were writing on (the same function button selected in step 3 or device button in step 4).

8. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

EDIT TEXT FOR FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

To edit text for favorite channel buttons:


2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button and then the favorite channel button on which you wish to write text. There are five LCD pages of favorite channels. Select the page you wish to write on by pressing the

PAGE button.

C-14

Lexicon

4. The character to be changed on the button you selected will blink and you can change the character using the number pad buttons on the remote control. The characters assigned to each number pad button are shown in the previous column. It will cycle to a different character each time the same number pad button is pressed.

5. Save the edited text by pressing the same function button selected in step 4.

6. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

RECALLING THE PREPROGRAMMED THREE-DIGIT NUMBER


2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

3. The LCD display will alternately flash device names and the threedigit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then exit to the SETUP mode.

4. Before the 10 seconds are up, pressing the HOME button on the remote will stop the flashing and exit to the SETUP mode.

5. Exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

ERASING LEARNED BUTTONS

To erase learned buttons:



3. Press the LEARN button.

RV-8

4. If you wish to erase all the learned functions in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next

LCD screen.

5. To erase all the buttons in a single device or an individual button in the device, press the DEVICE button.

6. Press the device button (TV, VCR, MAIN, etc.) to erase the button(s) from the device.

Note:

Press the PAGE button and then press the DEVICE button (TV, VCR, etc.) to erase the learned function in the device button itself.

7. Press the ALL button to erase all the learned buttons in the device and press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

8. Press a single button to erase individual buttons one at a time. This will show all the functions in the device. Press the button you wish to erase.

PROGRAMMING THE BACKLIGHT TO TURN OFF

The backlight can be toggled On and Off by pushing the LIGHT button on the top right side of the remote. It can also be set to turn off at a predetermined time.

To program the backlight:


2. Press the LIGHT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Using the number pad buttons, enter the desired backlight time

(in seconds). It can go up to 99 seconds. Save the time by pressing the button to the right of the time just assigned.

4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button.

Appendix C

Note:

The time entered in SETUP for the backlight to go off is extended each time a button is pushed. The light will turn off at the predetermined interval after the last button has been pushed.

CLONING THE RV-8 REMOTE CONTROL

To clone the remote from another remote:


2. Press the CLONE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press either the SEND or RECV button depending upon the role of the remote control. If the RV-8 remote is to be copied from, press the SEND button. If it is to be copied to, press the RECV button.

4. To clone the entire remote, press the ALL button. To clone only one device at a time, press the DEVICE button.

5. Press the DEVICE button to show all of the devices. Press the device button you wish to clone.

6. Set the RV-8 remote head-to-head with another RV-8 remote. Each unit should be in either cloning from or cloning to mode, based on the above steps.

7. Press the START button on both units to begin cloning. It will take about 40 seconds to complete the cloning. The LCD will flash

“GOOD” upon completion.

8. Exit from the Cloning mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

C-15

Appendix C

ADJUSTING THE LCD CONTRAST

To adjust the LCD contrast:

Pressing the HOME button and Up on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast darker. Pressing the HOME button and Down on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast brighter.

BATTERY LIFE

Under normal operating conditions, the batteries will last approximately six months. If the batteries are running low, there will be reduced range from the remote, commands that are not sent properly, or are not sent at all. The backlighting of the LCD screen and the buttons may be diminished. Should any of these occur, replace the batteries immediately. To ensure proper performance of the remote, use four new AAA alkaline batteries. However, the worn batteries should be replaced with a fresh set as soon as possible. Do not mix new and used batteries.

Note:

If the batteries are running low, the LCD displays “LOW BATTERY” when the POWER button is pressed, or when the HOME and ENT buttons are pressed simultaneously.

The remote has an internal memory lock system that retains all of the programs and learned functions for an extended period of time in the event of battery loss or replacement.

Lexicon

CAUTION!

The LCD screen is breakable glass. Do not tap the LCD screen to activate devices. Use the rubber buttons beside the labels on the screen.

The RV-8 remote control is not waterproof. Never immerse it in water. Keep the LCD screen dry. Immediately wipe off any spilled liquid.

Do not expose the RV-8 remote to extreme temperatures.

Keep it away from any heat sources.

Avoid dropping the remote control.

Clean the LCD screen with a soft cloth. Never use abrasives or cleaning solutions on the soft cloth.

RECALLING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES FOR THE RV-8

To recall the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1.

Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

3. The LCD display will alternatively flash device names and the three-digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then exit to the SETUP mode. Make sure that the audio code has the correct (default) number.

4. The MAIN zone default audio code should be 001. The ZONE 2 default audio code is 302, and the ZONE 3 default audio code is

303. If one of these codes has inadvertently been changed, reprogram the codes as described below.

C-16

RV-8

Appendix C

REPROGRAMMING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES TO DEFAULT CODES

To reprogram the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1.

Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.


3. The remote should flash SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Press the button for the zone you wish to reprogram.

4. The remote should flash FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD screen. Select the MAIN zone button.

5. The remote should flash ENTER NUMBER. The correct (default) audio codes for the RV-8 zones are as follows: MAIN zone is 001,

ZONE 2 is 302 and ZONE 3 is 303.

6. Enter the correct code.

7. Press SAVE on the right of the LCD screen to enter and save the audio code for the zone.

8. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

C-17

Appendix C

THREE-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES

AUDIO

Manufacturer Codes

ADC 007

ADCOM

AIWA

082 092 225 161 269

018 104 170 202 203 213 211 188

AMC 125 126 127 128 258 281 282

AMEND 054

AMX 196

ANGSTROM 142

ARCAM 141

AUDIO ACCESS

AUDIO ALCHEMY

147

135

AUDIO DESIGN

AUDIO EASE

AUDIO FILE

AUDIO MATRIX

AUDIO SOURCE

AUDIO TECHNICA

B & K

BOSE

194 221 011

021 196 207

071

167

273

134

096 097

070 170 224

BRYSTON 023

CARVER 006 028 061 071 201 214 226 180 185 022 029 077 284

CASIO 076

CHIRO 140

CINEMA SOUND 034 134

CLARION 026

CURTIS MATHES 076

DENON 002 034 109 215 229 230 027 037 234 259

EIGER 149

ELAN 057

ENLIGHTENED AUDIO 099 098

Lexicon

AUDIO


FISHER 047 214 180 182

GOLDSTAR 008

HAFLER 174

HARMAN KARDON 231 233 254 153 154 118 121 227 277

INKEL 197

JBL

JCPENNY

JEFF ROWLAND

JENSEN

263

076 216

206

058

JVC

KENWOOD

240 163 191 114 266 279

026 066 145 146 181 190 197 192 182 199 151 222 180

005 280

KOSS 216

KYOCERA 007

LEXICON 120 235 236 237

LINN 124

LUXMAN 137 139 052 165 115 004 009

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

038 164 152 208

006 028 031 040 063 185 186 251 265

MCINTOSH 238

MCS 076

MERIDIAN

MITSUBISHI

MONDIAL

MYRYAD

NAD

100 012 013

242 243 204

157 158 042 043 081 112

276

186 113 283

NAKAMICHI 111 244 245 172 183

NEC 176

ONKYO

OPTIMUS

017 046 064 107 108 187 079 080 090 179 209 270 275

026 041 138

C-18

RV-8

AUDIO


PANASONIC 032 195 219 177

PARASOUND 129 130 132 261

PHAST 196

PHILIPS

PIONEER

249 250 251 063

014 033 039 044 045 050 069 159 168 116 035 078 198

RCA 010 048 117 156 067

REALISTIC 019 056 073 075 095

REVOX 162

SAMSUNG 016

SANSUI 040 048 110 119 065 228

SCOTT 019 091

SEARS 076

SHARP

SHERWOOD

026 094 131 175 181

024 038 055 102 103 105 106 051 030

SONY 018 093 223 247 248 160 166 015 101 184 218 271

SOUNDESIGN 036

SSI 068

SUMO 171

TAEKWANG 138

TEAC

TECHNICS

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

WARDS

YAMAHA

005 019 049 111 212 217

122 176 193 219 178 177 200 257 262

136

060 087 198 278

180

026 253 169 067 173 205 264 232 089 264 274 285

DVD


APEX DIGITAL

DENON 007

087

080

HARMAN KARDON 084

JVC 012

LG 091 057 074

MAGNAVOX 066

MARANTZ 083

MITSUBISHI 017

NAD 088

PHILIPS 066

PIONEER 023 092 107 108

PROCEED 086

SHARP 094

SONY 033

THETA DIGITAL 032

ZENITH 057 074 091

Appendix C

C-19

Appendix C

SAT


ALPHASTAR 123

AMPLICA 050

BIRDVIEW 129 113 051 126

BSR 053

CAPETRONICS 053

CHANNEL MASTER 013 014 015 018 036 055

CHAPARRAL 008 009 012 077

CITOH 054

CURTIS MATHES 050

DRAKE

DX ANTENNA

ECHOSTAR

005 006 007 010 011 112 116 141 052

024 046 056 076

038 040 057 058 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 122

ELECTROHOME 089

EUROSAT 114

FUJITSU 017 021 022 027 133 134

GENERAL ELECTRIC 151 106 150

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 003 004 016 029 031 059 101 148

HOME CABLE

HOUSTON TRACKER

080 044 029

033 037 039 104 057 051

HYTEK 053

HYUNDAI 149

ICR 023

KATHREIN 108

LEGEND 057

LUTRON 132

MACOM 010 059 063 064 065

MEMOREX 057

NEXTWAVE 028 124 125

PACE 143

PANSAT 121

PERSONAL CABLE 117

C-20

Lexicon

SAT


PHILIPS 071 152 153

PROSAT

PROSCAN

RCA

072

151 106 150

151 106 150

SAMSUNG 123

SATELLITE SERVICE 028 035 047 085

SONY 103

STARCAST 041

SUPERGUIDE

TEECOM

020 124 125

023 026 075 087 088 090 107 130 137

TOWN & COUNTRY

UNIDEN

023 026

016 025 042 043 044 045 048 049 078 079 080 086 101

135 136

VIEWSTAR 115

ZENITH 081 082 083 084 091 120

RV-8

VCR


AKAI 016 043 046 124 125 146

AMPRO 072

ANAM 031

AUDIO DYNAMICS 012 023 039 043

BROOKSONIC 035 037 129

CAPEHART 108

CRAIG 003 040 135

CURTIS MATHES

DAEWOO

031 041

005 007 010 065 108 110 111 112 116 117 119

DAYTRON 108

DBX 012 023 039 043

ELECTROHOME

EMERSON’

059

006 017 025 027 029 031 034 035 036 037 046 101 129

131 138 153 162 116

003 008 009 010 FISHER

FUNAI 034

GE 031 063 072 107 109 144 147

GO VIDEO

GOLDSTAR

132 136 155 040 115

012 013 020 101 106 114 123

HARMAN KARDON 012 045

HITACHI 004 018 026 034 043 063 137 150 160 013

INSTANTREPLAY 031

JCL

JCPENNY

031

012 013 015 040 066 101

JENSEN

JVC

KENWOOD

043

012 031 043 048 050 055 060 130 150 152

014 048 034 047

LLOYD 034

LXI 003 009 017 034 106

MAGIN 040

Appendix C

VCR


MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

031 034 041 067 068 156 164

012 031 067 069

MARTA 101

MEI 031

MEMOREX 003 010 014 031 034 053 072 101 102 134 139

MGA 045 046 059

MITSUBISHI 013 020 045 046 051 059 061 142 151 049

NEC 012 023 039 043 048

NORDMENDE 043

ORION 025

PANASONIC 066 070 083 133 140 145 157 163 074

PENTAX

PHILCO

013 020 031 063

031 034 067

PHILIPS 031 034 054 067 071 101

PILOT 101

PIONEER 013 021 048

PORTLAND 108

PULSAR 072

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

REALISTIC

066 145 075

123

013 020 041 107 109 140 144 145 147 034 040 158

003 008 010 014 031 040 053 054 101

RICO 058

RUNCO 148

SALORA 014

SAMSUNG 032 040 066 102 104 107 109 112 113 115 120 122 125

SANSUI 022 043 048 135

C-21

Appendix C

VCR


SANYO

SCOTT

003 007 010 014 134 102

017 037 112 129 131

SEARS

SHARP

003 008 009 010 013 014 081 101 017 073 112

031 054 149 159 165

SHINTOM 024

SIGNATURE 034

SONY 003 031 052 056 057 058 076 077 078 149 154

SOUNDESIGN 034

STS 013

SYLVANIA 031 034 059 067

SYMPHONIC 034

TEAC 034 039 043

TEKNIKA 019 031 034 101

THOMAS 034

TMK 006

TOSHIBA 008 013 042 047 059 079 082 112 131 081

UNITECH 040

VECTOR RESEARCH 012

VICTOR 048

VIDEO CONCEPTS 012 034 046 141

VIDEOSONIC 040

WARDS 003 013 017 024 031 034 040 053 054 131

YAMAHA

ZENITH

012 034 039 043

034 048 056 058 072 080 101

C-22

Lexicon

TV


ADMIRAL 072 081 161 160

AMPRO 073 167 157 183

AMSTRAD 052

ANAM

AOC

043 054 056 080 112 131

197 004 112 058

AUDIOVOX 076

BLAUPUNKT 088

CAIRN 201

CANDLE 197 002 003 004

CAPEHART 058

CETRONIC 043

CITIZEN 197 002 003 004 043 101 103 143

CLASSIC 043

CONCERTO 004

CONTEC 043 050 051

CORONADO 143

CURTIS MATHES 197 101 004 143

CXC 043

DAEWOO 004 016 043 044 076 103 114 125 127 143

DWIN 177

DYNASTY 043

DYNATECH 062

EIKI 187

ELECTROHOME 024 076 143 196

EMERSON

FISHER

197 004 005 028 043 047 048 050 051 076 096 143 151

153 154 155

007 057

RV-8

TV


FUJITSU 198

FUTURETECH 043

GE 197 008 009 034 056 073 074 130 144 155 160 161 165

GOLDSTAR

HALL MARK

HITACHI

004 091 157 183

004 102 106 112 113 116 119 127 143

004

004 009 010 011 012 023 075 143 158 163 166 072

INFINITY 164

JBL 164

JCPENNY 197 004 008 009 024 030 065 101 143 156 160

JENSEN 013

JVC 034 038 070 083 145 199

KEC 043

KMC 143

KTV 197 043 143 154

LODGENET 072

LOGIK 072

LUXMAN 004

LXI 166 007 015 052 081 160 164

MAGNAVOX 197 003 004 022 059 060 061 063 064 127 160 164 094

MATSUI 164

MEMOREX 007 072 004

METZ 088

MGA 197 004 024 028 042

MINERVA 088

MITSUBISHI 004 024 028 040 042 109 124 146 191

MTC 197 004 062 101

Appendix C

TV


NEC 132 130 134 197 040 016 024 056 019

NIKEI 043

ONKING 043

ONWA 043

ORION 096

PANASONIC 034 056 080 092 164

PHILCO

PHILIPS

197 003 024 056 059 060 063 064 164 004

197 003 004 005 038 059 093 164 127

PIONEER 197 018 023 025 116 135 190 203 204

PROSCAN

PROTON

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

144 160 161 165 167

004 058 131 143 171 173 193

034 056 092

019 043 143 004 127

RCA

REALISTIC

160 161 165 065 156 144 197 004 023 024 056 074 152

007 019 043 047

ROCTEC 186

RUNCO 168 169 178 179 180 181 182 183 073 157

SAMPO

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SCOTT

SEARS

197 058 004 202

004 050 089 101 105 127 143 160

166 007 020 053 057 082 187

004 028 043 048 143

015 030 004 007 028 057 143 094 160 082 165 166

SHARP 170 081 019 028 029 014 004 022 143 175

SIEMENS 088

SIGNATURE 072

SONY 070 085 139 147 126 185 194

SOUNDESIGN 004 028 003 043

SPECTRICON 112

C-23

Appendix C

TV


SUPRE MACY

SYLVANIA

002

197 003 059 060 063 064 164 044 160 127

TANDY 081

TECHWOOD 004

TEKNIKA 002 003 004 024 028 043 072 101 143

TELEFUNKEN 037 046 086 087

TELERENT 072

TERA 172

TMK 004

TOSHIBA 007 015 030 040 062 101 138

TOTEVISION 143

VIDEO CONCEPTS

VIDIKRON

146

174 184 188 192

VIDTECH 004

WARDS 004 008 009 019 028 060 061 063 064 072 074 143 164

WESTING HOUSE

034

076

YORK 004

YUPITERU 043

ZENITH 072 073 095 103 157 183

ZONDA 112

Lexicon

CD


AIWA

AKAI

059 065 088 089 105 122 170 187

085 195 202

AMEND 118

ARCAM 238

AUDIO ACCESS

AUDIO EASE

AUDIO TECHNICA

119 147

165

046

CALIFORNIA AUDIO 103 008

CAPETRONIC 063

CARVER 185 041 044 050 086 107 130 134 135 138 139 203 204

167

CLARINETTE 182

CREEK 159

CROWN 035

EMERSON

FISHER

042 069 102

050 185 134 008

FRABA 111

GENEXXA 010 069 102

GOLDSTAR 080

HAITAI 093

HARMAN KARDON 018 033 047 208

INKEL 130 143 144

JC PENNEY 014 061 092 141

JENSEN 158

JVC 004 022 136 163 213 214 242 243

C-24

RV-8

CD


KENWOOD 185 007 023 055 071 072 142 137

KOSS 061

KRELL 241

KYOCERA 005

LOTTE 102

LUXMAN 011 028 070 076

LXI 059

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

044 107

027 041 044 051 077 107 209

MCINTOSH 212

MCS 014 073 092

MEMOREX 010

MITSUBISHI 179

MITSUMI 153

MODULAIRE 182

MONDIAL 147

MYRYAD 244

NAD 006 005 067 178

KAKAMICHI 217 218 219 095

NIKKO 046

ONKYO

OPTIMUS

030 038 039 168 169

010 050 057 058 081 082 083 085 093 195

PANASONIC 103 201 172 008 068

PARASOUND 233

PIONEER 010 020 025 056 174 175 176

PROCEED 239

PROTON 044 107 228

CD


RADIO SHACK

RCA

REALISTIC

ROTEL

182

017 042 150

042 050 051 102 181 182 187

044 107 161 178 250

SANSUI 044 069 107 128 171 190 125

SANYO 050

SHARP

SHERWOOD

026 031 051 066

003 019 051 096 112 115 119 166

SIGNATURE 033

SONY 048 081 097 126 133 177 225 226 164

SOUNDESIGN 251

SUMO 155

Appendix C

TANDY 010

TEAC 015 034 036 051 052 101 131 140 079

TECHNICS 060 103 200 172 184 008 068

TECHWOOD 076

THETA DIGITAL 234 235

TOSHIBA

VECTOR RESEARCH

VICTOR

006 067 091 160 148

080

004 022 114 124

YAMAHA 024 046 054 186 183 245

YORX 182

C-25

Appendix C

LD


FUNAI 120

MARANTZ 211

MITSUBISHI 121

NAD 121

PANASONIC 113

PHILIPS 032

PIONEER

RADIO SHACK

106 117 121

120

RCA 002

REALISTIC 049

RUNCO 127

SANYO 075

TECHNICS 113

THETA DIGITAL 032

Note:

The LD codes are stored in DVD.

C-26

PHONO


3M 152

AIWA 164

ARCHER 155

AUTON 191

DMX 156

DRAPER SCREEN 204

DWIN 080

EVERQUEST 206

EXTRON 151

FAROUDJA 184

FUJI 209

JERROLD 153

JVC 185

KENWOOD 185

LITE-TOUCH 208

LUTRON 077 158 159

MINDPATH 205

NSM 161

PIANO DISC PLUS 085

PHILIPS 090

POLK AUDIO 162

REPLAY 075

RUSSOUND 081

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 156 163

SIMA 082

SOLO ELECTRONICS 207

SONY 104 164 165 166

STARCOM 153

TURBOSCAN 167

VELODYNE 203

XANTECH 168 169 170 171 172 188 189

Lexicon

RV-8

CABLE


ABC 103 003 004 039 042 046 053

AMERICAST 099

ANTRONIX 014

ARCHER 005 007 014

BELL SOUTH 099

CENTURION 092

CENTURY 007

CITIZEN 007

COMSAT 074

COMTRONICS 030

DIGICABLE 101

EAGLE 020 030 040

ECHOSTAR 106

ELECTRICORD 032

GENERAL ELECTRIC 072

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 103 074 104

GNC 099

GOLDEN CHANNEL 030

HAMLIN 049 050 055

JERROLD

MAGNAVOX

103 002 003 004 008 009 010 069 074

010 012 064 079 095 094

MEDIA ONE 107

MEMOREX 052

MITSUBISHI 102

M-NET 037

MOVIE TIME 028 032

NOVAPLEX 092

NSC 015 028 038 071

CABLE


OAK 031 037 053

PARAGON 052

PHILIPS 006 012 013 020 085 095

PIONEER 103 034 051 063 076 105

PRUCER 059

RCA 047

RECOTON 098

REGENCY 057

SAMSUNG 030

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 003 011 041 042 043 045 046

SIGNAL 030

SIGNATURE 103

SL MARX 030

SONY 096

STARCOM

STARGATE

002 004 008 009

008 030 097 104

TADIRAN 030

TIME WARNER 043

TOCOM 039 040 056

TOSHIBA 052

UNITED CABLE

UNIVERSAL

VIEWSTAR

ZENITH

004 053

005 007 014 032 035

012 015 018 086 087 088 089

052 060 093 100

Appendix C

C-27

Appendix C

TAPE


AIWA

CARVER

015 071 100 114

006 008 027 024 036

DENON 105 227 229

FISHER 064

GOLDSTAR

HARMAN KARDON

JVC

011

233

106 116 239 240

KENWOOD 005 013 023 026 064 145 146 181 190

LINN 124

LUXMAN 035 137 139

MAGNAVOX 027

MARANTZ 014 027 056 065 087

MCINTOSH 238

NAKAMICHI

ONKYO

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PIONEER

244 245 025

002 012 016 017 018 019 115

026 054 055

007 010 032 088 195

003 039 047 050 066 098 222

SANSUI

SHARP

SHERWOOD

SONY

027 113 119 224

026 057 131 175 181

038 004 028 030 033 034

020 022 052 084 089

TEAC

TECHNICS

009 059 212

007 010 076 088 109 122 199

TOSHIBA 112

VICTOR 106

YAMAHA 021 026 031 067 040

C-28

Lexicon

D

Appendix

Installation Worksheet ................................................................ D-2

Appendix D

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET

INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

D

DVD1 DVD2

5.1a

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

ANLG BYP

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

D-2

SAT VCR TV

Lexicon

CD TUNER PHONO

RV-8

SPEAKER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT LEFT/RIGHT

CENTER

SIDE LEFT/RIGHT

REAR LEFT/RIGHT

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ULTRA2SUB

ASA

UNITS


CAL NOISE

SUB LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

I/O CONFIG

Analog Inputs

Amplifier Outputs

THX SETUP

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

8 STEREO INPUTS

MAIN 7.1


SETTINGS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

Appendix D


2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

D-3

Appendix D

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET

(continued)

DISPLAY SETUP

ON

-

SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

BRIGHTNESS

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME



MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

ZONE 2 PWR ON

ZONE 3 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

TRIGGER SETUP

Circle all parameters set to ON.

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

TV

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

PRO LOGIC

+

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2

-

CH SURROUND

2

-

CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2

-

CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a SurEX

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

D-4

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

Lexicon

RV-8

3-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES WORKSHEET

MANUFACTURER COMPONENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TV

CD

PHONO

CODE(S) USED

Appendix D

D-5

Appendix D

PREPROGRAMMED LCD TEXT FOR OTHER DEVICES

DVD1

PROG MENU

DISPL SETUP

CLEAR MEMO

REPEA TITLE

A-B SHUFF

PAGE 1

DVD2

RANDO ANGLE

RETUR S-ON

AUDIO S-CHA

TIME SLOW+

SOUND SLOW-

PAGE 2

OFF

ON/OFF

D-6

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

SKIP+

SKIP-

SEARCH

UP

DN

LEFT

5

6

3

4

1

2

EJECT

PAUSE

9

0

7

8

DISPLAY

ENTER

SAT

FAUCH ACTIO

ALPHA REC

NEXT SERVI

VIEW BACK

ALT HOP

PAGE 1

SAT

FETCH HELP

A E

B F

C G

D H

PAGE 2

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

SEARCH

UP

DN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

3

4

1

2

MENU

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

7

8

5

6

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

VCR

V/T

DISP

INPUT

SLOW

VCR-P SLOW+

F. ADV SLOW-

XPLA EJECT

PAGE 1

VCR

PROG T-SPE

COUNT A-TRK

RESET A-CH

CLEAR ADD

T-REC DELET

PAGE 2

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

5

6

3

4

1

2

RECORD

PAUSE

9

0

7

8

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

SEARCH

UP

DN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

FF

Lexicon

RV-8

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

TV

T/V

SLEEP

INPUT

A-CH

CC ADD

CC-SN DELET

RESET ANT

PAGE 1

TV

P-ON

SWAP

P-OFF

STILL

SOURC LOCAT

POSI FREEZ

PAGE 2

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

PRE CH

UP

DN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

3

4

1

2

MENU

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

7

8

5

6

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

CD

PROG INTRO

DISPL TIME

CLEAR FADER

REPEA EDIT

A-B

PAGE 1

CD

DISK 1 DISK 6

DISK 2

DISK 3

DISK 4

DISK 5

PAGE 2

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

OFF

ON/OFF

TRACK+

TRACK-

RANDOM

SKIP-

SKIP+

PLAY

STOP

REW

FF

5

6

3

4

1

2

EJECT

PAUSE

9

0

7

8

DISPLAY

DISC

C

D

A

B

E

PHONO

PAGE 1

F

G

H

I

J

C

D

A

B

E

PHONO

PAGE 2

F

G

H

I

J

FF

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

2

3

II, INFO

1

6

7

4

5

8

9

0

DISPLAY

ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

UP

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

5

6

3

4

1

2

RECORD

PAUSE

9

0

7

8

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE CH

UP

DN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

FF

Appendix D

D-7

Numerics

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

2.0 ENCODING parameter, 2-34

2CH BYPASS listening mode, 6-34

2CH BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-32

2-CH MODE menu, 3-15

2-CH Parameter, D-2

2-CH parameter, 3-12

2CH STATUS menu, 2-30

2-CH SURROUND listening mode, 6-15

2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-15

5, 6-26

5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

5.1 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-23

5.1 ANALOG STATUS menu, 2-33

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 6-16

5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-17

5.1 L7 TV listening mode, 6-17

5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 parameter, 3-62

5.1 MONO listening mode, 6-24

5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-23

5.1 MONO SURR listening mode, 6-24

5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-21

5.1a 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-31

5.1a L7 FILM listening mode, 6-29

5.1a L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-30

5.1a MODE menu, 3-16

5.1a parameter, 3-12

5.1a STANDARD listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX SurEX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-30

5.1-channel connectors, 2-7

8 STEREO INPUTS option, 3-60

A

A/V SYNC DELAY parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4 about the RV-8, 1-2

AC input connector, 2-9

ACADEMY FILTER parameter, 6-15, 6-23, 6-39 adjusting the LCD contrast, C-16 advanced speaker array, 3-35 amplifier channel status, 2-13 amplifier output connectors, 2-13 amplifier outputs, 2-7 amplifier overview, 2-13 analog audio input connectors, 2-7

ANALOG BYPASS parameter, 3-18

ANALOG IN parameter, 3-7, 3-8, D-2 anamorphic trigger signals, 3-18

ANLG IN LVL parameter, 3-7, 3-9, 3-23

ANLOG BYPASS parameter, 3-17 arrow buttons, 2-15

ASA parameter, 3-29, 3-35 assigning input connectors, 3-7 audio controls

BALANCE parameter, 4-6

BASS parameter, 4-2

CLEAR PRESET parameter, 5-3

FADER parameter, 4-6

LISTEN TO PRESET parameter, 5-3

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-4

NAME parameter, 5-3

TILT EQ parameter, 4-4

TREBLE parameter, 4-2

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-6

AUDIO CONTROLS menu, 4-2, D-4 audio output connectors, 2-8, 2-9

Index

AUTO, 6-4

AUTO AZIMUTH parameter, 6-4, 6-39

AUTO FREQUENCY parameter, 3-78

AUTO GAIN parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens, 3-48

Autoload, 2-12

AUTOLOAD parameter, 3-74

Automatic Calibration, 3-36

Automatic calibration using microphones, 3-37

B

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-20, D-4

BALANCE parameter, 4-2, D-4

BASS CONTENT parameter, 6-13, 6-39

BASS ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

BASS parameter, 4-2, D-4 frequency response graph, 4-3

BASS PEAK LIMITERS, 3-53

BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, 3-58, D-3

BASS RT parameter, 6-12, 6-39

BASS XOVER parameter, 6-39 battery installation, 1-6 battery life, C-16

BGC parameter, 3-29, 3-35

BIT RATE parameter, 2-34 boundary gain compensation, 3-35

BRIGHTNESS parameter, D-4

C

CAL NOISE parameter, 3-58, D-3

Calibration automatic, 3-36 manual, 3-53

CALIBRATION parameter, 6-13, 6-39

Index

CATHEDRAL listening mode, 6-12

CENTER DEPTH parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-40

CENTER MIX LVL parameter, 2-34

CENTER MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

Center output connector, 2-7

CENTER parameter, 3-29, 3-31, 6-37, 6-40 changing input names, 3-5

CHANNELS parameter, 2-34 checking microphones, 3-41

CHURCH listening mode, 6-12

CLEAR ALL parameter, 3-75

CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

COMPONENT IN parameter, 3-7, 3-11

COMPONENT OSD parameter, 3-17, 3-20, 3-21, D-2 component video input connectors, 2-7

Composite video connectors, 2-8

COMPRESSION parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-40

CONCERT HALL listening mode, 6-11

CROSSOVER SETUP menu, 3-26

CTR WIDTH parameter, 6-8, 6-40

CUSTOM menu, 6-37, 6-40

CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67

CUSTOM parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10,

6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-40

CUSTOM SETUP Menu, 3-29

CUSTOM SETUP menu, 3-26, D-3 custom speaker setups, 3-26

CUSTOM vs PRESET listening modes, 6-37, 6-40

D

Declaration of Conformity, A-4

DIALOG OFFSET parameter, 2-34

DIG OUT RATE parameter, 3-23, 3-24 digital audio input connectors, 2-8 digital audio output connectors, 2-9

DIGITAL BYPASS parameter, 3-23, 3-24

DIGITAL IN parameter, 3-7

DIGITAL STATUS menu, 2-32

DIMENSION parameter, 6-8, 6-40 direct station access, 2-10

DISPLAY parameter, 3-76

DISPLAY SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-63

DISTANCES & LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

DISTANCES option, 3-36, 3-48 documentation conventions, 1-ii

DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, 3-15

Dolby DIGITAL parameter, 3-12

DOLBY PL + THX listening mode, 6-9

DOLBY PLII MOV listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, 6-9, 6-9

DOLBY STATUS menu, 2-30

DTS 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS listening mode, 6-28

DTS Neo

6 + THX listening mode, 6-10

6 CIN listening mode, 6-10

6 MUSIC listening mode, 6-10

DTS STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-28

DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode, 6-27

DTS-ES 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS-ES DECODING parameter, 6-25

DTS-ES DISCR listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES MODE menu, 3-16

DTS-ES parameter, 3-12

DTS-ES STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS-ES THX listening mode, 6-27

Dynamic listening modes, 3-13, 6-3

E

EARLY RFLX LVL parameter, 6-41

EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

I-2

Lexicon

EDIT INPUT NAME menu, 3-5 editing presets, 2-12

EFFECT LVL parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-23, 6-

41

ES DECODING parameter, 6-25, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-40,

6-42, 6-44, 6-46

ES ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EX DECODING parameter, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22, 6-41

EX ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-57

F

factory-default settings, restoring, 7-4

FADER parameter, 4-2, D-4

FORMAT DETECT parameter, 3-21

FORMAT parameter, D-4

FREQUENCY option, 3-76

Front L/R output connector, 2-7, 2-7

FRONT L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-31

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, 3-66

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter, 3-63

FRONT STEERING parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-17, 6-42 front-panel

BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-66 display, 2-3 overview, 2-2, 2-4

RV-8, 2-2

STATUS parameter, 3-66

H

HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode, 6-34

HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE DTS listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE L7 listening mode, 6-34 headphone output, 2-5 headphone overview, 2-14

HEADPHONE parameter, 3-69 highlights, RV-8, 1-4 high-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28 horizontal bar graphs, 2-16

RV-8

I

I/O CONFIG SETUP menu, 3-2

INPUT BALANCE parameter, 6-13, 6-42 input connectors, 2-7 microphone, 2-8

INPUT NAME menu, 3-5

INPUT parameter, 2-35

INPUT SELECT parameter, 3-17, 3-19, D-2 input selection buttons, 2-4 remote control, 2-18

INPUT SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-4, D-2

INPUT TYPE parameter, 2-35

INPUTS

Advanced, 3-17 changing names, 3-5

Main Zone, 2-28, 3-2 installation considerations, 1-5

INTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-56

IR IN connector, 2-9

IR receiver, 2-3

L

L7 FILM listening mode, 3-13, 6-4

L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-5

L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode, 6-5

L7 TV listening mode, 6-4

LEDs, IR receiver, 2-3

LEGACY VIDEO parameter, 3-21 level meters, 3-10

LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, 3-55

LEVELS CALIBRATIONS menu, D-3

LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

LFE MIX parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22,

6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-32,

6-33, 6-42

LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-59

LIMITER parameter, 3-58, 3-59

LISTENER POS parameter, 6-42 listening mode activating, 6-2 descriptions, 6-4 parameter descriptions, 6-39 preferred, 6-3 selection buttons, 6-3 listening modes, preferred, 3-12, 3-14

LIVE! CALIBRATION menu, 3-3 parameter, 3-80 performing, 3-83

LIVE! listening mode, 6-35

LIVE! STATUS menu, 2-33

LIVENESS parameter, 6-11, 6-42 loading presets, 2-11

LOCK OPTIONS, 3-79

AUDIO CNTRL parameter, 3-79 menu, 3-3

MODES parameter, 3-79

SETUP parameter, 3-79

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-2 frequency response graph, 4-5

LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter, 6-13, 6-42 low-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

M

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0 parameter, 3-62

MAIN 7.1 parameter, 3-62

MAIN ADVANCED option, 3-17

MAIN menu, 2-15

MAIN PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Main Zone Off button, 2-5

Main Zone selection buttons, 2-4 maintenance, 7-4 manual analog audio adjustments, 3-10 manual calibration, 3-53

MANUAL parameter, 3-9, 3-10 manual speaker distance calibration, 3-54

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-53

MASTER LEVEL parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-43

MAX VOLUME parameter, 3-69 menu arrow buttons, 2-15 menu item selection, 2-15 menu navigation, 2-15 menu options, 2-16

Menu tree, B-2

Index

MIC MODE menu, 3-16

MIC parameter, 3-12

MICROPHONE CHECK option, 3-36 microphone input connectors, 2-8 microphones automatic calibration, 3-42, 3-48 checking, 3-40 connecting, 3-37, 3-80 improper positioning, 3-39, 3-46, 3-47, 3-82 placement, 3-42 proper positioning, 3-38, 3-43, 3-44, 3-45, 3-81

MID RT parameter, 6-12, 6-43

MIX ROOM parameter, 2-35

MODE ADJUST menu, 6-2 mode buttons, 2-4

MODE parameter, 2-35

MONO listening mode, 6-16

MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-15

MONO SURROUND listening mode, 6-16

Mute button, 2-5

MUTE LEVEL parameter, 3-68

N

NAME parameter, 3-5 naming presets, 2-11

NIGHTCLUB listening mode, 6-11

O

Off buttons, 2-5, 2-5 on-screen display

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-65

FORMAT parameter, 3-65

POSITION parameter, 3-65

STATUS parameter, 3-64

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, 3-64, D-4

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY parameter, 3-63 output connectors audio, 2-8, 2-9 trigger, 2-8 video, 2-7

OUTPUT LEVELS menu, 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9,

I-3

Index

Lexicon

6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20,

6-21, 6-22, 6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31,

6-32, 6-33, 6-43

Output levels, calibrating automatic, 3-36

Bass Peak Limiters, 3-58 manual, 3-55

P

PANORAMA listening mode, 6-13

PANORAMA parameter, 6-8, 6-43 parameter drop-down menus, 2-16 parameter relationships, 6-47 parameters listening mode menu, 6-39

STATUS menu, 2-34 parameters, preferred listening mode selection, 3-12 phono input connectors, 2-8

POWER MANAGEMENT menu, 3-3 power switch, 2-9

PRE-DELAY parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-43 preferred listening mode selection, 3-14

Preferred listening modes, 3-12

PRESET NAME option, 3-76 product registration, 1-5 program operation parameters, 3-71 programming macro buttons, C-10 cloning the remote control, C-15 editing text on buttons, C-13 erasing favorite channel, C-13 erasing learned buttons, C-14 erasing macro functions, C-12, C-13 erasing punch through functions, C-13 programming backlight, C-15 punch through functions, C-12 recalling preprogrammed numbers, C-14 sample sequence, C-11

R

RADIO TEXT parameter, 3-77

RDS NAME option, 3-76

REAR DLY OFFSET parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17,

6-26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-43

Rear L/R output connector, 2-7

REAR L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44 rear-panel overview, 2-6

RV-8, 2-6 recalling zone audio codes, C-16

RECORD parameter, 3-23, 3-24

RE-EQUALIZER parameter, 6-4, 6-6, 6-9, 6-10, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-43

REGION parameter, 3-72 remote control battery installation, 1-6 buttons, 2-17 command matrix, 2-18, 2-18 operation considerations, 2-14 remote control buttons, 2-17 remote control overview, 2-14 remote control programming, C-2 auto scan with three-digit number, C-6 device activation, C-2 macro operations, C-3 overview, C-4 programming device buttons, C-8 programming favorite channels, C-9 programming function buttons, C-8 using learning method, C-7 using programmed codes, C-5

REMOTE ONLY parameter, 3-70 reprogramming zone audio codes, C-17

RESET MODE parameter, 6-38, 6-44

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu, 3-6 restoring factory-default settings, 7-4

REVERB LVL parameter, 6-40, 6-42, 6-44, 6-44, 6-46

ROLLOFF parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44 routine maintenance, 7-4

RS-232 connectors, 2-9

RV-8 about, 1-2 highlights, 1-4 product registration, 1-5

S

safety instructions, 1-ii

SAMPLE RATE parameter, 2-35 saving presets, 2-11

Scan Mode, 2-11

SCAN SENS parameter, 3-73

SCROLL RATE parameter, 3-77 selecting a station, 2-10

SET CROSSOVERS option, 3-25

SET DISTANCES menu, 3-51

SET LEVELS menu, 3-51

SETTING DISTANCES menu, 3-49

SETTING LEVELS menu, 3-49

SETUP menu, 2-16, 3-2

SHAPE parameter, 6-44

SIDE L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44

SIZE parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44

SOUND STAGE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-44

SOURCE parameter, 6-46

SPEAKER ANGLE parameter, 6-45

SPEAKER DISTANCES, 3-53

SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, 3-54

SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-25 speaker setup parameters, 3-29

SPEECH DETECT parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-45

SPREAD parameter, 6-45

Standby button, 2-4

STATUS menu level meters, 2-35 parameters, 2-34

STATUS menus, 2-29

SUB & SUB LVL parameter, 6-45

SUB L/R LVL parameter, 6-33

SUB LEVEL parameter, 6-15, 6-16, 6-23, 6-24, 6-29

SUB parameter, 6-37

SUBWOOFER parameter, 3-29, 3-33

SURR MIX LVL parameter, 2-35

SURR ROLLOFF parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-23

SURROUND DLY parameter, 6-8, 6-45

SURROUND EX parameter, 6-19, 6-31, 6-45

SURROUND MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-46

S-VIDEO 16

I-4

RV-8

9 parameter, 3-17, 3-18

S-VIDEO OSD 4

3 parameter, 3-17, 3-20

S-Video output connectors, 2-8

T

three-digit preprogrammed codes, C-18

THX listening mode, 6-18

THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-19

THX SETUP Menu, 3-29

THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, 3-28, 3-28

THX SurEX listening mode, 6-18

THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-18

THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter, 3-29, 3-34

TILT EQ parameter, 4-2 frequency response graph, 4-5

TREB CUT RT parameter, 6-46

TREBLE parameter, 4-2 frequency response graph, 4-3 trigger output connectors, 2-8

TRIGGER SETUP, 3-70

TRIGGER SETUP menu, 3-2 troubleshooting, 7-2

Troubleshooting automatic calibration, 3-52

Tune/Seek access, 2-10

TUNE/SEEK Buttons, 2-5, 2-5 tuner antenna connectors, 2-8 tuner overview, 2-10

TUNER PRESETS menu, 5-2

TUNER PRESETS parameter, 3-75

Tuner Regions, 3-73

TUNER SETUP menu, 3-3

TUNER SETUP option, 3-72

Tuner status, 2-29

Two-line Status, 2-28, 2-29

U

Ultra2-certified, 3-34 understanding the zones, 2-28

USE LAST parameter, 3-14

V

VIDEO IN parameter, 3-11 video input connectors, 2-7 video output connectors, 2-7

VOCAL ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-26,

6-29, 6-30, 6-46

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-68 volume knob, 2-3

W

WORD LENGTH parameter, 2-35

Z

Z2 PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Z3 PWR ON parameter, 3-69

Zone 2 Off button, 2-5

Zone 2 selection buttons, 2-4

Zone 3 Off button, 2-5

Zone 3 selection buttons, 2-4

ZONE2 ADVANCED inputs, 3-23

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-2, 4-2

ZONE2 IN parameter, 3-21

ZONE2 IN parameter settings, 3-22

Zones, understanding, 2-28

Index

I-5

LIMITED WARRANTY

Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty on this product:

What is the Duration of this Warranty?

This warranty will remain in effect for three (3) years from the original date of purchase.

Who is Covered?

This warranty may be enforced by the original purchaser and subsequent owners during the warranty period, provided the original dated sales receipt or other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time of service.

What is Covered?

This warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship on this product, except as specified below. The following are not covered:

1.

Damage resulting from

A. Accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.

B. Failure to follow instructions contained in the user guide.

C. Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by

Harman Specialty Group.

D. Failure to perform recommended periodic maintenance.

2.

Causes other than product defects, including lack of skill, competence, or experience on the part of the owner.

3.

Damage occurring during any shipment of this product. Claims for shipping damages must be made with the carrier.

4.

Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified, or removed.

What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group

Assume?

Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material expenses for covered items. Payment of shipping charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.

How is Service Obtained?

When this product needs service, write, telephone, or fax Harman Specialty Group to request information about where the unit should be taken or sent. When making a written request, please include your name, complete address, and daytime telephone number; the product model and serial numbers; and a description of the problem. Do not return the unit to Harman

Specialty Group without prior authorization.

When Shipping a Product for Service . . .

1.

Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are covered by this warranty, Harman Specialty

Group will pay return shipping charges to any destination in the United States using the carrier of our choice.

2.

Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is strongly recommended.

3.

Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.

(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be presented whenever warranty service is required.)

4.

Do not include accessories such as power cords or user guides unless instructed to do so.

What are the Limitations of Implied

Warranties?

Any implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the length of this warranty.

What Certain Damages are Excluded?

Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defective product is limited to repair or replacement of that product, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shall not be liable for damages based on inconvenience; loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted operation; commercial loss; or any other damages, whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.

How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?

Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. As such, the above limitations may not apply.

This warranty is not enforceable outside of North

America. This warranty provides specific legal rights.

Additional rights may be provided by some states.

Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413

USA

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0490 www.lexicon.com

Customer Service

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)

Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register this product within 15 days of purchase. To do so, complete and return this card or register online at www.lexicon.com. Retain the sales receipt for proof of coverage.

Mr.

Single

Mrs.

Married

Ms.

Divorced

Miss

Widowed

First Name Last Name

Company

Mailing Address

City

Telephone Number

Title

State

Fax Number

Zip

Email Address

Product Model

Version

Purchase Date

Serial Number

Where did you purchase this product?

Age

Under 18

18-24

25-34

35-49

50-64

65+

Education

High School

College

Graduate School

Certificate:

Household Income

Under $20,000

$20,000 to $34,999

$35,000 to $49,000

$50,000 to $74,999

$75,000 to $99,000

$100,000+

How did you learn about this product? Choose one:

Friend

Colleague

Teacher

Store salesperson

Store display

Received as a gift

Advertisement

Magazine Article

Own other Lexicon products

Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product?

Sound

Features

Quality

Brandname

Value for price

Other:

Durability

What are your three favorite magazines?

1.

2.

3.

What are your three favorite websites?

1.

2.

3.

What features would you like to see added to this product in the future?

RV-8 01/06

A Harman International Company

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06